Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (237 trang)

tieng anh 6

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.71 MB, 237 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

<b>PHÂN PHỐI CHƯƠNG TRÌNH TIẾNG ANH 6</b>
<b>HỌC KỲ I</b>


<b>Bài</b>


<b>Số</b>
<b>tiết/</b>


<b>bài</b>


<b>Tiết</b>


<b>PPCT</b> <b>Nội dung </b> <b>Trang</b>


1


Làm quen với mơn học và cách
học


2


a) A1 + A2 + A3 + A4


P. 10 - 11
b) Number 0 - 5


<b>Unit 1 </b>


3


a) A5 + A6 + A7 + A8



P.12 - 13
b) Number 6 - 10


<b>Greetings</b> 5


4


a) B1 + B2 + B3 + B4 + B6


P. 14 - 16
b) Number 11 - 15


( P. 10 -19 )


5


a) Number 16 - 20


P.17 - 19
b) C1 + C2 + C3 + C4


6


C6 (Numbers 1-20


P.19
to count & give telephone


numbers)



<b>Unit 2 </b> 7 A1 + A2 + A4 P.20 - 22


8 B1 P.23 - 24


<b>At School</b> 6 9 B3 + B4 P. 24 -25


10 B5 + B6 P. 25


( P. 20 -29 ) 11 C1 P.26 - 27


12 C2 + C3 + C4 P. 28- 29


<b>Unit 3</b> 13 A1 + A2 P. 30- 31


14 A3 + A4 + A6 P.32 - 34


<b>At home</b> 5 15 B1 + B2 P.35 - 36


16 B3 + B4 + B5 + B6 P. 37
( P. 30 - 43 ) 17 C1 + C2 + C4 P.38 - 39


<b>Grammar practice</b> 18 ôn tập P.40 - 43


<b>Kiểm tra</b> 19 Kiểm tra 1 tiết


<b>Unit 4</b> 20 A1 + A2 P. 44


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

<i><b></b></i>



<b>---Big or small?</b> 6 22 B1 + B2 + B3 + B4 + B5 + B6 P.47 - 48


23 C1 + C2 + C8 P.49 +51


( P. 44 - 51 ) 24 C1 + C3 + C8 P.49 + 51


25 C4 + C5 + C6 + C7 + C8 P.50 + 51


<b>Unit 5</b> 26 A1 + A2 P.52 - 53


27 A3 + A4 P.53 - 54


<b>Things I do</b> 6 28 A5 + A6 + A 7 P.54 - 55


29 B1 + B2 + B3 + B4 P.56 - 57


( P. 52 - 59 ) 30 C1 P.58


31 C2 + C3 + C4 P. 59


<b>Grammar practice</b> 32 ôn tập P.60 - 61


33 A1 + A2 + A3 P.62 - 63


<b>Unit 6</b> 34 A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 P.64


35 B1 + B2 P.65 - 66


<b>Places</b> 6 36 B3 + B5 P. 67



37 C1 + C2 + C6 P.68 - 69
( P. 62 - 71 ) 38 C3 + C4 + C6 P.70 - 71


<b>Kieåm tra</b> 39 kiểm tra 1 tiết


40 A1 + A2 P.72 - 73


<b>Unit 7</b> 41 A1 + A3 + A5 + A7 P.72 - 75


6 42 B1 P.76 - 77


<b>Your house </b> 43 B2 + B3 + B4 P. 77


44 C1 + C2 + C3 P.78 - 80


( P. 72 - 81 ) 45 C4 + C6 P.80 - 81


46 A1 P. 82


<b>Unit 8</b> 47 A1 P. 82


48 A2 + A3 + A4 + A6 + A7 P.83 - 85


<b>Out and about</b> 6 49 B1 + B2 + B4 P. 86 -88


50 C1 + C2 P. 89- 90


( P. 82 - 95 ) 51 C3 + C4 + C5 +C6 P.90 - 91


<b>Grammar practice</b> 52 ôn tập P.92 - 95



53 <b> ÔN TẬP HỌC KỲ I</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

HỌC KỲ II



<b>Unit 9</b> 55 A1 + A2 P.96 - 97


56 A3 + A4 + A5a + A7 P.97 - 99


<b>The body </b> 5 57 B1 P.47 - 48


58 B2 + B3 P. 101


( P. 96 - 103 ) 59 B1 + B4 + B5 + B7 96 - 103
60 A1 + A2 + A5 + A8 104 - 107


<b>Unit 10</b> 61 A3 + A4 + A6 +A8 105 -107


6 62 B1 + B2 + B3 108 - 109


<b>Staying</b>


<b>healthy</b> 63 B4 + B5 + B6 110 - 111


64 C1 + C2 P. 112


P. 104 -113 65 C3 + C4 + C5 P. 113


<b>Unit 11</b> 66 A1 + A5 114 - 115



67 A2 + A3 +A4 116 - 117


<b>What do you </b> 5 68 A2 + A5


116+
upload.123
doc.net


<b>eat ?</b> 69 B1 + B2 119 -120


( P. 114 - 121 ) 70 B3 + B4 + B5 + B6 120 -121


<b>Grammar practice</b> 71 ôn tập 122 - 123


<b>Kiểm tra</b> 72 kieåm tra 1 tieát


<b>Unit 12</b> 73 A1 + A2 + A6 124 - 125


74 A3 + A4 +A5 + A6 125 - 126


<b>Sports and</b> 6 75 B1 + B2 + B3 127 - 128


<b>pastimes</b> 76 B4 + B5 + B6 128 - 129


77 C1 + C2 + C3 + C4 130 - 131
( P. 124 - 133 ) 78 C5 + C6 + C7 132 - 133


<b>Unit 13</b> 79 A1 134 - 135


80 A2 + A3 135



<b>Activities</b> 5 81 A4 + A5 136 - 137


<b>and seasons</b> 82 B1 138 - 139


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

<i><b></b></i>


---( P.134 - 139 ) 83 B2 + B3 P.139


<b>Unit 14</b> 84 A1 + A2 + A3 140 - 141


85 A4 + A5 + A6 142 - 143


<b>Making plans</b> 5 86 B1 + B2 + B3 + B4 144 - 145


87 B5 + B6 + B7 145 - 146
( P. 140 - 149 ) 88 C1 + C2 + C3 + C4 147 - 149


<b>Grammar practice</b> 89 ôn tập 150 - 153


<b>Kiểm tra</b> 90 kiểm tra 1 tiết


<b>Unit 15</b> 91 A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 154 - 156


92 A5 + A6 +A7 156 - 157


<b>Countries</b> 6 93 B1 158


94 B2 + B3 + B4 + B5 159 - 161



( P. 154 - 165 ) 95 C1 + C2 162 - 164


96 C3 + C4 165


<b>Unit 16</b> 97 A1 + A3 166 - 167


98 A2 166 - 167


<b>Man and the</b> 5 99 A4 + A5 + A6 168


<b>environment</b> 100 B1 + B2 169 - 170


( P. 166 - 173 ) 101 B4 + B5 + B6 + B7 171 - 173


<b>Grammar practice</b> 102 ôn tập 174 - 175


103 <b> ÔN TẬP CUỐI NĂM</b>


104 <b> ÔN TẬP CUỐI NĂM</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

Week: 1 Date of preparation: 15/8/2011
<i> Period : 1 Date of teaching : 16/08/2011</i>



<b>INTRODUCTION</b>
<b>I/GIỚI THIỆU MƠN HỌC</b>


Chương trình mơn tiếng Anh cấp THCS nhằm hình thành và phát triển cho học
sinh những kiến thức, kĩ năng cơ bản về Tiếng Anh và phẩm chất trí tuệ cần thiết để
tiếp tục học lên hoặc đi vào đời sống lao động.



Tiếng Anh 6 là cuốn sách thứ nhất trong bộ sách bốn cuốn được biên soạn theo
cùng quan điểm đó là quan đỉểm chủ điểm


Sách Tiếng Anh 6 gồm 16 đơn vị, mỗi đơn vị được thực hiện 5 hoặc 6 tiết. Mỗi
đơn vị được biên soạn theo một chủ điểm nhất định và chủ đỉểm đó gần gũi, sát thực
với mục đích, nhu cầu, sở thích và đời sống hàng ngày của học sinh.


Trong khi học – Học sinh cần chú ý theo hướng dẫn của thầy cô để đạt những
yêu cầu sau về :


1.Kiến thức:


- Nắm được kiến thức cơ bản tối thiểu và tương đối hệ thống về Tiếng Anh thực
hành hịện đại phù hợp với lứa tuổi.


- Có sự hiểu biết ban đầu về văn hố của một số nước sử dụng Tiếng Anh..
2. Kỹ năng:


- Kỹ năng nghe: Nghe hiểu Tiếng Anh sử dụng trong lớp học và hiểu các chủ
điểm giao tiếp bằng Tiếng Anh trong và ngoài lớp học .


- Kỹ năng nói: Thực hiện được các yêu cầu giao tiếp hàng ngày bằng Tiếng
Anh, có thể diễn đạt các nội dung giao tiếp đơn giản hàng ngày có liên quan đến các
chủ điểm và nội dung ngơn ngữ đã học trong chương trình.


- Kỹ năng đọc : đọc hiểu nộI dung chính của đoạn văn ngắn (150 từ ) đơn giản
về các chủ điểm đã học trong chương trình.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

<i><b></b></i>


- Kỹ năng viết : Viết có hướng dẫn các đoạn văn về mô tả hoặc các báo cáo
tường thuật về các hoạt động của cá nhân hoặc lớp học trong khn khổ chủ điểm của
chương trình và viết phục vụ các nhu cầu giao tiếp cá nhân và xã hộI đơn giản..


3. Thái độ tình cảm:


- Có thái độ tình cảm đúng đắn đối với Đất nước, Con người, Nền văn hố và
ngơn ngữ đang học nhờ đó phát triển tình cảm tốt đẹp đối với ngơn ngữ và văn hố
dân tộc.


- Xây dựng và phát triển ý thức cũng như năng lực làm việc trong cộng đồng
thông qua các hoạt động rèn luyện ngôn ngữ.


- Bước đầu có nhu cầu và biết cách tự học để nắm và sử dụng tiếng nước ngoài
trong học tập và đời sống .


<b>II/HƯỚNG DẪN CÁCH HỌC:</b>


Qua phần giới thiệu khá chi tiết về môn học ,các em cần nắm bắt một số chỉ dẫn
về cách học dưới dây:


+ Sách: Bao gồm sách giáo khoa Tiếng Anh 6 + sách bài tập Tiếng Anh 6.
(workbook)


+ Phương pháp học: Học theo “phương pháp giao tiếp” theo trình tự “Nghe –Nói –
Đọc – Viết”. Cố gắng phát âm đúng âm điệu khi lặp lại . Khi nói đồng thanh hoặc cá
nhân thì ( nói to – tự nhiên).


Nghe - Nói là hai kỹ năng chính. Các kỹ năng khác sẽ được hướng dần dần để
biết Đọc và Viết./.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

<i>Week :1 Date of preparation: 16/08/2011</i>
<i>Period :2 date of teaching : 17/08/2011</i>


<b>UNIT 1:</b>

<b> </b>

<b>GREETINGS</b>


<i><b>Lesson 1 : Section A - HELLO (1- 4)</b></i>
<i><b> I/ Objetives</b></i>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Greet and acquainted with one another


- Introduce their name
- Count from oh to five.
<b> II/ Language content.</b>


+ Vocabulary: hi, hello, is, am, name
+ Structure: - My name is...
- I am...


III/Techniques: dialogue build, pair work, group work, substitution
IV/Teaching aids: book, flash card, chart...


<b> </b>V/ Procedures


<i><b>Teacher’s & students’</b></i>
<i><b>activities</b></i>


<i><b>Contents</b></i>


? What do you say when


you meet your friends or
other people?


Ss: (chào bạn, em chào
cô...)


I. Warm up


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

<i><b></b></i>


---T introduces vocabulary
* Note : “ Hi” & “Hello”
is used to greet in
friendly manner between
friends, relatives.


T: read word by word
- Ss:- listen & repeat
- read in chorus


- read individual
- copy down


-T gives modal
dialogues. Then T reads
Ss repeat.


-Ss role play reading the
dialogues



-Ask Ss to observe the
dialogues above then
give structures ( 2 ways
to introduce one’s name)
- Have Ss practice
introducing their real
name.


- Ask Ss to look at a
hand of the teacher.
Then T counts the
fingers on the hand.
- Ss listen and guess the
meaning of the numbers
while repeating.


-T guides Ss to play the
game.


1/Pre-teach
- hi: (trans)
- hello: (trans)
- is/ am (v), (exp. )
- name (n)


* Check Vo : Slap the board.


2/ Dialogue build:


Ex1: Hoa: Hi, I am Hoa.


Nga: Hi, I am Nga.


Ex2: Hung: Hello, My name is Hung.
Nam: Hello, My name is Nam.
* Structures:


I am.... = I’m + tên.
My name is....= My name’s + tên.
<b>II. Practice: </b>


* A4


I’m ( Ba ) / My name’s (Ba).
* Numbers:


-oh : 0 -three:3
-one: 1 -four: 4
-two: 2 -five: 5
*Checking: Slap the board.
2 4 3


1 5

IV. Consolidation:


1/ Dictation.
2/ Word cue drill




acti


0


Huế


054 Đà Nẵng0511
Đ ắc Laéc


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

- Read the number:
three, five oh, one,
four, two,
four-five-three, three-two- oh,
five –two,
three-two-five-one.


-Ss listen and write.
- T: stick the poster one
by one on the board.
- Modal one cue , then
ask Ss to practice in
pairs.


S1 : Quang Ninh, please.


S2 : Oh – three – three


<b>* HOMEWORK:</b>


- Learn vocabulary by heart. & Prepare next part: A5 - A8


-Do exercises1,2 / P.8,9 in workbook


<b>* Comments:</b>


...


...


...


...


...


...



LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011
Hải Phịng


031


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

<i><b></b></i>
<i>---Week : 1 Date of preparation: 16/08/2011 </i>
<i>Period : 2 Date of teaching : 17/08/2011</i>


<i> </i>


<i> UNIT 1: </i>

<b>GREETINGS</b>



<i><b> Lesson 1 : </b></i>

<i><b>Section A - HELLO (5-8)</b></i>


<b>I/Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- use “How are you?” to greet each other.
- count from six to ten.



<b>II/ Language content:</b>


+ Vocabulary: fine, Mr., Miss, six..., ten
+ Structure: - How are you?


- I’m fine. Thanks.


<b>III/Techniques: Question & answer, pair work, group work, </b>


Communicative approach, jumbled words


<b>IV/Teaching aids: book, flash card, realia</b>
<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<i><b>Teacher’s & students’ activities</b></i> <i><b>Contents</b></i>


- Divide the class into two teams
- Ask Ss from each team to go to the
board and write down the correct words.
The team which is faster with more
correct words wins the game.


- Explain some new words.
-Ss listen and guess the meaning.
.


T: read word by word
- Ss:- listen & repeat



- read in chorus
- read individual
- copy down


-Ss look at the picture of Ạ5 and guess


<b>I/ Warm up:</b>
* Jumbled words


-ifev = five -ho = oh.
-otw = two -rouf = four.
-eno = one -heert = three
<b>II/Presentation.</b>


1/Pre-teach:


-fine (adj.): (trans)
-are (v) : (exp.)


-thanks = thank you: (exp.)
-Miss (exp.)/(realia)


-Mrs. (exp.)/realia)
-Mr. (exp.)/realia)


* Check Vocabulary: What and Where


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

the content of the dialogue. Then put the
sentences into the dialogue



-Give feedback


-Let Ss listen and fine out the answer.
- Give the correct answer.


-Ss role play reading the dialogue
-Give structures


-Have Ss look at the pictures of A6 and
make similar dialogues


- Modal with one or two students
- Ss practice in pairs.


-Call on some pairs to present in front of
the class.


-T counts Ss in two desks and asks Ss
listen.


-Ss listen and repeat.


-The T writes them on the board.


-Call on one student to go to the board
and match


- Have Ss listen and write down the
telephone numbers.



-Give feedback


a) Ba: How are you?.
b) Lan: Hello, Ba.


c) Lan: I’m fine, thanks. And you?
d) Ba: Fine, thanks


e) Ba: Hi, Lan
*Checking prediction.


1:e, 2:b, 3:a, 4:c, 5:d
<b>STRUCTURES. </b>


“ Hỏi thăm sức khoẻ”:


S1: How are you?
S2: I’m fine, thanks.
<b>III/ Practice</b>


* Speaking


* Numbers:


-six : 6 - nine : 9
-seven :7 -ten : 10
-eight : 8


<b>IV/ Consolidation</b>


1/Matching:


six seven


eight


nine


ten
2/Dictation.


050866113 0985035259
050686396 0914752123
036822006 0905486051


<b>* HOMEWORK:</b>


-Write the exercise A7 into your notebook.


LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011


7
9


8


10


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

<i><b></b></i>


---Learn vocabulary by heart


-Prepare the next part B1.
*Comments:


...


...


...


...


...



<i>Week :1 Date of preparation : 17/08/2011 </i>
<i>Period :3 Date of teaching</i> : <i>19/08/2011</i>




<i> UNIT 1: </i>

<b>GREETINGS</b>



<i><b>Lesson2: Section B - GOOD MORNING (B1-6)</b></i>
I/Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :


- greet each other.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

- count from eleven to fifteen.
<b>II/ Language content:</b>


- Vocabulary: good morning/afternoon/night.., child
- Structures : - How are you?


- We’re fine.


<b>III/Techniques :</b>


Pair work, communicative approach, role play, picture drill
<b>IV/ Teaching aids:</b>


Book, flash card. Teacher’s book, cassette.
<b>V/ Procedures</b>.


<i><b>Teacher’s & students’ activities</b></i> <i><b>Contents</b></i>


-Ask Ss to say greeting when you meet
other people.


-Stick 4 pictures of B2 on the board.
- Have Ss guess the time in each picture.
-Give feedback


- Present some new words by using
pictures or explanation.


- Read aloud
- Ss repeat


- Ss: read in chorus
read individually


- Read the dialogue of B3/15.
- Ss listen and repeat


-Let Ss role play reading the dialogue.


-Ask Ss to look at the pictures and
practice speaking in pairs


<b>I/ Warm up </b>
Hi/Hello
*Picture drill
.


<b>II/ Presentation </b>
1.Pre-teach.


<i><b>- good morning (picture )</b></i>
- good afternoon (picture)
- good evening (picture)
- good night (picture)
- good bye (picture)


- we (explanation) we are = we’re
- you are = you’re. (explanation).
- children (realia ).


*Checking: R & R


2. Presentation dialogue.
<b>III/ Practice . </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<i><b></b></i>
---Let Ss complete the dialogue of B4/16


into notebooks by writing.



-Call some pairs to read their dialogue.
-Correct & give answer key:




-Give the numbers by counting Ss in
some tables.


- Read aloud
- Ss repeat.


-Guide Ss to practice (pair work)


- Stick pictures of B1 on the board
again. Let Ss write the correct words


2,Written practice. (B4/16)
Lan: Good afternoon ,Nga.
Nga: (1) ...
Lan: How are you?


Nga: (2)... . (3)...?
Lan: Fine thanks.


Nga: Good bye.
Lan: (4)...


* Key: 1 Good afternoon, Nga.
2 I’m fine thank you.


3 And you?


4 Bye/Good bye
3 .Numbers.


-eleven: 11 -fourteen: 14
-twelve: 12 -fifteen: 15
-thirteen: 13


* Practice: Picture drill.



Ex S1: seven and eight?
S2: fifteen.


<b>IV/ Consolidation/Further practice . </b>
Matching





<b>* /HOMEWORK:</b>


- Write the dialogue of B4 into your notebooks.
- Prepare next part C1-2,5.


<i>*</i>

<b>Comments:</b>



...



...


...


...


...



7 + 8 9 + 4
6 + 9


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

<i>Week : 2 Date of preparation : 20/08/2011 </i>
<i>Period:4 Date of teaching : 23/08/2011 </i> <i> </i>


<i> </i>


<i> UNIT 1: </i>

<b>GREETINGS</b>



<i><b>Lesson 4 - </b></i>

<i><b>Section C: HOW OLD ARE YOU? (C1-2-5)</b></i>


<b>I/Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- ask and answer about age.


- count from sixteen to twenty


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

<i><b></b></i>
--- review from one to fifteen.


<b>II/Language content:</b>


-Vocabulary: old, sixteen.... twenty
-Structures : - How old are you?



- I’m thirteen


<b>III/Techniques: asking and answering, pair work, </b>


group work, mapped dialogue, drawing
<b>IV/Teaching aids: Flash cards, pictures</b>


<b>V/Procedures.</b>


<b> Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b>
- Ss write numbers from one to fifteen on a
small paper.


- Read the numbers incorrect order.


-Ss listen and write them in correct order.
-Introduce the numbers by using tables or
students in class to count


- Read aloud


- Ss listen and repeat.


- Prepare 10cards and have Ss to play
the game.


-Guide Ss to give structure about age.
-T contracts: How old are you? with.
How are you?



-Ask Ss to practice asking and answering


<b>Contents</b>
<b>I/ Warm up : </b>


*Ordering numbers.


six, twelve ,two, five, thirteen, eight,
eleven, four, fourteen, seven, ten, fifteen,
one, three, oh, nine.


<b>II/Presentation.</b>
1/Pre-teach.


-sixteen: 16
-seventeen: 17
-eighteen: 18
-nineteen: 19
-twenty: 20
<b>III/Practice.</b>


a, Pelmanism.


si


xt


ee



n


se


ve


nt


ee


n


ei


gh


te


en


ni


ne


te


en


tw



en


ty


16 17 18 19 20


3/Presentation dialogue.(C3/18)
a. Pre-teach.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

( free talk)


- Draw 3 people : Lan, Nam ,Nga on the
board to introduce the dialogue


- Hang flip chart on the board with word
cues.


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs


- Call some pairs to play the roles in chart
to say (book closed)


Correct the mistakes


b, Practice:


Ex S1: How old are you?
S2: I’m twelve.
<b>IV. Consolidation</b>
<b>*</b>



Mapped dialogue


Lan: Hi, ……… How ………. ?
Nam: ………….Lan……fine,………….
And ………….?


Lan : ………, thanks. Nam, This is Nga.
Nga: Hello,……… How old …………
Nam: Hi. ……….twelve.


<b>*/HOMEWORK.</b>


- Learn new words and the structures by heart.
- Practice reading the dialogue.


- Prepare next part C3-4,6.

<b>*/Comments:</b>



...


...


...


...



<i> Week: 2 Date of preparation : 23/08/2011 </i>
<i> Period:5 Date of teaching : 24/08/2011 </i>
<i> </i>


<i><b>UNIT 1:</b></i>

<b> </b>

<b>GREETINGS</b>




<i><b>Lesson 5 - Section C: HOW OLD ARE YOU? (C3-4,6)</b></i>
<b>I/ Objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to


- do further practice in numbers one to twenty to count.
- give telephone numbers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

<i><b></b></i>
<b>---II/Language content:</b>


-Vocabulary: review numbers
-Structure: review “This is +ten”.
“How old are you?”.


<b>III/Techniques: asking and answering, pair work, group work., pelmanism</b>
<b>IV/Teaching aids: flash card., flip chart </b>


<b>V/Procedures.</b>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b>


-Divide the class into two teams. Then
guide Ss to play the game.


-T uses the cards from lesson four.


-Divide the class into two teams.
- The team which find more right


words will win.


Ss :each writes down one number
from one to twenty.


-Other Ss give Yes-No questions to
guess the number


- Divide the class into 2 teams.
- Write 10 numbers on the board ,
Tell Ss each number is for a question
but three of them are lucky numbers .
If Ss choose a lucky number , they do
not need to answer any question but
they get 2 points and they can choose


<b>Contents</b>
<b>I/Warm up</b>


*.Pelmanism..


si


xt


ee


n


se



ve


nt


ee


n


ei


gh


te


en


ni


ne


te


en


tw


en


ty



16 17 18 19 20


<b>II. Presentation</b>
1.Jumbled words.


-tghie = eight -treinteh = thirteen.
-lewtev = twelve -ytwnet = twenty.
-eesnv = seven -ientenen = nineteen.
-neelve = eleven -ntreeouf =fourteen
2. Guessing Game.


EX: 4


S1: Is it four?.
S2: No


S3: Is it four?
S2: Yes.
<b>III. Practice</b>


* Lucky numbers


1 2 3 4 5


6 7 8 9 10


Lucky numbers are: 3, 6 & 10
1. Count from 0-20.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

another number.


- Let Ss play the game .


- Hang flip chart on the board
- Ask Ss to do the exercise in
individually.


-Correct and give answer key.
a. Hello, I am Hoa.


b. Nam, This is Son.
c. How old are you?
d. My name is Lan.
e. How are you today?


5. Answer “How old are you?”
7. Count numbers in 0-20.
8. Put the letter into a word
“etevnseen”=seventeen.


9. What do you say when a person ask you:
“How are you?” ?


<b>IV/Further Practice: </b>


* Put the words in correct order.
a. am/Hoa/I/hello.


b. .Nam/ is/this/Son.


c. old/are/how/you/
d. is/name/my/Lan.
e. today/are/how/you/?


<b> */ HOMEWORK.</b>


-Write further practice into your notebooks.
-Prepare A 1- 4 of unit 2


*Comments:


...


...


...


...



<i>Week :2 Date of preparation : 25/08/2011 </i>
<i>Period : 6 Date of teaching : 26/08/2011 </i>


<b>UNIT 2: </b>

<b>AT SCHOOL</b>



<i><b>Lesson 1 - Section: A - COME IN (A1-4)</b></i>

<b>I/</b>



<b> Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use classroom imperative to
understand teacher’s commands.


<b>II/Language content:</b>



- Vocabulary: come in, sit down, open...
- Grammar: Imperative.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<i><b></b></i>
group work, guessing, noughts and crosses


<b>IV/Teaching aids: flash cards, pictures, realia</b>
<b>V/Procedures</b>.


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b>
- T sticks the table on the board.
-Guide Ss to play the game. (Ss give
answer only).


+plus: cộng.
+multiply: nhân.
+subtract: trừ.


-Introduce some new words.


-Read new words aloud
- Ss repeat.


-Ss read individually.
- Read the text aloud
- Ss : Repeat


Read in Chorus
Read individual



-Ask Ss to look at the pictures /21
and match each picture with the
correct word or phrase word.( work
individually).


-Give answer key.


- Give the formation of imperative
-T mimes: (open your book, sit down,
stand up, come in, close your book)
-Guide Ss to play the game.


<b>Contents</b>
<b>I/Warm up: </b>


* Noughts and Crosses.


9-5 20-7 10-2


17+1 6+5 8+4


3-3 6x3 5+3


<b>II/Presentation.</b>


<b>1.</b> Pre teach vocabulary:
- come: (v) (pict. ).


-sit down >< stand up: (v) (action).


-book: (n) (realia).


-open your book: (act).
close your book: (act).


*Checking: Rub out and remember.
2.Presentation text: A 1/ 20.


<b>III/Practice .</b>
1.Matching.


a. Open your book.
b. Sit down.


c. Come in.


d. Close your book.
e. Stand up.


<b>*Structure: Imperative </b>
<b> From: V + O /A</b>
Ex: Open your book.


<b>2.</b>


Mine Drill :
Students say:
+Open your book.
+Sit down.



-etc.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<b>-T: stand up. Ss don’t do</b>


-T: Simon says stand up. Ss do.
-Let Ss make the dialogue by using
the mapped dialogue


- Ask Ss to do the exercise.


<b>IV/ Production: </b>
<b>* Mapped dialogue</b>.


Miss Hoa <sub>Children</sub>


... morning
How...?
Fine ..., sit...
and open...


...morning Miss
Hoa


We’re ...
How...?
Yes, Miss!
Yes, miss!
<b>V/Further practice:</b>


*Put the correct word in the brackets.


a. ...down, please.


b. ...your book.
c. ...notebook, please.
d. ...up, please.


e. ...in,


<b>*/HOMEWORK:</b>


- Learn structures and dialogue by heart.
- Do exercise in workbook.


- Prepare next part B 1,2


<i>*</i>

<i><b>Comments:...</b></i>


...



<i>Date of preparation : 28/8/2010 </i> <i> Week : 3</i>
<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 8</i>


UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL


<i><b>Lesson 2 - Section B - WHERE DO YOU LIVE ?(1-2) </b></i>


<b>I - Objectives</b>


By the end of this period, the students will be able to use “ Where do you


live ?” questions and answers to talk about the places you live.


<b>II - Language content </b>


+ Vocabulary: live, house, street , city, what , where, How
+ Grammar : What’s your name? - My name’s ………


Where do you live? - I live on --- street.


<b>III - Techniques</b>: - Hang man , noughts and crosses


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---IV - Teaching aids</b> :Pictures, flip charts
V- Procedures

<b> : </b>



<b>Teacher’s &students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


- Have Ss play game “ Hang man “
with words : sit down , stand up, open
your book, …


- Introduce some new words
Ex: We live in Viet Nam


Ex: We live in Buon Ma Thuot City.
- Read new words aloud s


- Ss: - Repeat



- Read in chorus
- Read individual


- Copy in their notebooks
- Read the dialogue aloud
- Ss:- Listen


- Repeat


- Play the role to practice
- Introduce the new structures


Note : Tiếng Anh Mỹ (AE) dùng giới
từ <b>on </b>trong cụm từ <b>live on + location.</b>


Ví dụ : I live on Cau Giay Street,
nhưng tiếng Anh Anh (B E ) dùng giới
từ <b>in </b>trong trường hợp này .


<b>A. Warm up</b>


* Hang man


<b>B. Presentation</b>


1, Pre- teach


1. (to) live (example)
2. a house (picture / draw)
3. a street ( picture )



4. a city (example)
5. What (trans. )
6. Where(trans.)
7. How(trans.)


* Check Vo. What & Where
2. Presentation Dialogue
( B1 – P.23)


* Model sentences:
A: Where do you live?


B: I live <b>on</b> <b>Tran Phu Street</b>.
in a house


a city
Hue
Vietnam


<b>C. Practice </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

- Model 2 cues , the whole class
repeats, then ask some students to
repeat individually


- Make sure the students remember the
exchange, then ask a new student /
give a new cue.



- Let all students work in pairs, one
asks , the other answers


- Stick this chart on the board and have
Ss play the game.


- Have each student asks and fills in
information about three others


a house <b>a city</b> BMT


City
Le Duan


Street


<b>Le Loi </b>
<b>street</b>


Hue
Example Exchange:


S1: Where do you live?
S2 : I live <b>on Le Loi Street</b>


* Noughts and Crosses


Trang Tien a city a house
Long Xuyen Da Nang Dong Hoi
a street Vietnam Y Jut Street



<b>D. Production</b>


* Survey


Name Street City


*. HOME WORK: - Learn structures and dialogue by heart.


- Do exercise in workbook & Prepare next part B 3,4


<i>Date of preparation : 28/8/2010 Week : 3</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 9</i>


UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL


<i><b>Lesson 3 - Section B - WHERE DO YOU LIVE? (3-4) </b></i>


<b>I - Objectives</b>


By the end of this period, the students will be able to use the questions: “
What’s your name?” and “ How do you spell it?” with the alphabet (a-z) to talk
about your name.


<b>II - Language content </b>


+ Vocabulary: spell , A - Z



+ Grammar : What’s your name? - My name’s ………
How do you spell it? – L- A - N.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---III - Techniques</b>: - Communicative approach
- Pair work & group work
- Role play


<b>IV - Teaching aids</b> :Pictures, flip charts
V- Procedures

<b> : </b>



<b>Teacher’s &students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>



- Sing
- Ss: listen


- Introduce new words


Turn on the tape ( 3 times ) –B 3
- Ss listen & repeat.


- Read individual


T: correct the mistakes.


- Have Ss play game “Shark attack”
with some words such as: house, open,


close, street, goodbye


- Read the dialogue aloud
- Ss:- Listen


- Repeat


- Introduce the new structures
-Explain the way to use questions:
“ What’s your name?” and “ How do
you spell it?”


- Note the way to read “spell-it” and
What’s_ your ... .


- Have Ss play the role to practice
- Model 2 cues , the whole class


repeats, then ask some students to
repeat individually


- Make sure the students remember the
exchange, then ask a new student /


<b>A. Warm up </b>.


* Sing “ The A, B, C” song


<b>B. Presentation</b>



1, Pre- teach


1. (to) spell ( trans. )
a, b, c, d, e, f, g
h, I, j, k, l, m, n
o, p, k, r, s, t, u
v, w, x, y, z


* Check Vo. Shark attack


2. Presentation Dialogue
( B4 – P.25)


* Model sentences:
A: What’s you name?
B: My name’s Lan
A: How do you spell it?
B: L – A – N , Lan.


<b>C. Practice </b>


* Word cue drill


Minh Nga Hue


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

give a new cue.


- Let all students work in pairs, one
asks , the other answers



- Divide the class into 2 teams.
- Write 10 numbers on the board ,
Tell Ss each number is for a question
but three of them are lucky numbers .
If Ss choose a lucky number , they do
not need to answer any question but
they get 2 points and they can choose
another number.


- Let Ss play the game


Example Exchange:
S1: What’s you name?
S2 : My name ‘s Minh
S1: How do you spell it ?
S2 : M-I-N-H, Minh.


<b>D. Production</b>


*Lucky number


1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
*- 1 ,5,7 are lucky numbers


2. What’s your name?
3. Spell from Z to A
4. Where do you live?


6. How do you spell your name?


8. How old are you ?


9. How are you?
10. Spell from A to Z


*. HOME WORK- Learn structures, the alphabet and dialogue by heart.
- Do exercise in workbook & Prepare next part B5-6


<i>Date of preparation : 02/9/2010 Week : 4</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………..</i>


<i> Period : 10</i>


UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL


<i><b>Lesson 4 - Section B - WHERE DO YOU LIVE? (5-6) </b></i>
<i><b> I - Objectives</b></i>


By the end of this period, the students will be able to further practice in
personal information, alphabet and numbers.


<b>II - Language content </b>


+ Vocabulary: Review
+ Grammar : Review


<b>III - Techniques</b>: - Communicative approach, slap the board
- Pair work & group work, shark attack
- Lucky numbers



<b>IV - Teaching aids</b> : Pictures, flip charts, realia,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

<i><b></b></i>
---V- Procedures

<b> : </b>



<b>Teacher’s &students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


-Have Ss play game “Slap the board”
to revise the way to read some letters
in the alphabet.


T : Read letter by letter from A to Z
Ss: Copy down as the teacher says
- Call 3 students to write on the board
- Correct the mistakes


- Guide Ss to remember the way to
read the alphabet earlier.


- read aloud


- Ss repeat, and then read individually


- Draw the figures of sea wave, steps, a
girl, a shark


- Draw dashes, each dash for a letter of
the word to revised .



-Ss have to try to guess the word. If
their guess is wrong , the girl has to
step down. If their guess is right , they
will get one mark. The game continues
until students find out the words, and
the shark can’t eat the girl.


T: Read the questions from a to d
Ss: Answer in oral


- Require Ss to write in their


notebooks, using real information about
themselves.


- Correct the mistakes


<b>A. Warm up </b>.
* Slap the board


<b>B. Presentation</b>


1. Dictation list
* Answer keys:


a b f I o q r
h c l y u
j d m w
k e n



g s
p x
t z
v
2. Shark attack


- - - morning , - - -/- - - - sit down
- - - eight, - - - - -night,- - - twenty


3. Written exercise ( B5 – P.25)


<b>C. Practice </b>


* Lucky numbers


1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
2, 5 , 8 are lucky numbers


a i u e


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

- Divide the class into 2 teams.
- Write 10 numbers on the board ,
Tell Ss each number is for a question
but three of them are lucky numbers .
If Ss choose a lucky number , they do
not need to answer any question but
they get 2 points and they can choose
another number.



- Let Ss play the game


- Stick this chart on the board and have
Ss play the game


1. How old are you?
3. Where do you live?
4. What’s your name?


6. How do you spell your name?


7. What’s the name of your city? How do
you spell it?


9. What’s your street name? How do you
spell it?


10. How are you?


<b>D. Production</b>


* Noughts and crosses


Lan 12 Le Loi Street
H - O - A -I Hueá Fine, thanks

Thuong Viet Nam 13


*.



HOME WORK - Learn this lesson again.


- Do exercise in workbook & Prepare next part C


<i>Date of preparation : 02/9/2010 Week : 4</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 11</i>


UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL


<i><b>Lesson 5 - Section C - MY SCHOOL ( 1 ) </b></i>


<b>I - Objectives</b>


By the end of this period, the students will be able to
- learn how to say what thing s are.


- use This /That positive statements and Y/N questions to talk about
people and things at school.


<b>II - Language content </b>


+ Vocabulary: this, that, student, teacher, class , classroom, desk
+ Grammar : - This / That is . . .


- Is this / that . . .


<b>III - Techniques</b>: - Communicative approach



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<i><b></b></i>
--- Pair work & group work


- Role play


<b>IV - Teaching aids</b> : Pictures, flip charts, realia, a small ball
V- Procedures

<b> : </b>



<b>Teacher’s &students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


- Give the ball for the first student (S1)
S1 says A – B – C ,then gives the ball
for S2 . S2 says D , then gives S3 , . . .
The student who says Z , will win the
game and get 1 mark , and then
continues to say A – B, ……….


Note: Each student can say 1,2 or 3
letters


- Show the picture to talk about subject
“ School”


- Introduce new words


- Read new words aloud s
- Ss: - Repeat


- Read in chorus


- Read individual


- Ask Ss practice vocabulary and revise
“ How do you spell it?”


- Read the dialogue aloud
- Ss:- Listen


- Repeat


- Introduce the new structures


-Explain the different between “ this
and that”.


<b>A. Warm up </b>.
* First to say Z !


<b>B. Presentation</b>


1, Pre- teach


1. a student (realia)
2. a teacher (realia)
3. a class (realia)
4. a classroom (realia)
5. a desk (realia)


* Check Vo: Word cue drill



Ex: T: write on the board: Hoïc sinh
S1: What is this in English?


S2 : ( a student)


S1: How do you spell it?


S2: ( S –T – U – D – E - N – T )
2. Presentation


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

- Read the dialogue aloud
- Ss: Listen


- Show the pictures from P. 26 to 27
- Have Ss play the role to practice
- Model 2 cues, the who le class
repeats, then ask some students to
repeat individually


- Make sure the students remember the
exchange, then ask a new student /
give a new cue.


- Let all students work in pairs, one
asks, the other answers


- Point to real things in and around the
classroom.


Ss: Work in open-pairs



That’s school.
Is this your class?


that teacher? – Yes,it is
- No , it isn’t


<b>C. Practice </b>


* Picture drill


*Example Exchange:
S1: Is this your ( school)?
S2 : No, it isn’t


<b>D. Production</b>


*Example Exchange:
S1:Is this your ( school)?
S2 : Yes, it is


*.


HOME WORK: - Learn structures and dialogue by heart.


- Do exercise in workbook & Prepare next part C2 –C4


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

<i><b></b></i>


<i>---Date of preparation : 02/9/2010 Week : 4</i>



<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 12</i>


UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL


<i><b>Lesson 6 - Section C - MY SCHOOL ( 2-4 ) </b></i>


<b>I - Objectives</b>


By the end of this period, the students will be able to learn how to use “What’s
this / that?” “It’s a/an …………” to talk about things in the classroom.


<b>II - Language content </b>


+ Vocabulary: a door, a window, a board, clock, . . .
+ Grammar : - What’s this / that?


- It’s a book


<b>III - Techniques</b>: - Pair work & group work. Dialogue build, picture drill


<b>IV - Teaching aids</b> : Pictures, flip charts, realia,
V- Procedures

<b> : </b>



<b>Teacher’s &students’ activities</b> <b>Content</b>


- Divide the class into 2 groups
T: says the first sentence



Group 1 : Say the second sentence
Group 2 : Say the second sentence


<b>A. Warm up </b>.
* Chain game
T: I’m a student.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

Group 1: ………


The group which says more sentences
will win the game.


T: Use this dialogue to elicit and
practice spelling vocabulary


- Show the picture to show the new
words,( Using the same as dialogue
buid)


- Read new words aloud s
- Ss: - Repeat


- Read in chorus
- Read individual
- Show the picture and ask
Ss: Answer


- Explain the way to use these
structures



- Give examples


- Show real things in class and model a
sentence


- Have Ss practice in pairs


- Call some pairs to present in front of
the class.


- Stick the poster on the board


- Ask Ss to find 10 words about things
in class in the word square


- Get Ss to work in pairs to find the
words


- Divide the class into 2 teams, Ss from
each team go to the board and circle
the words they have found then write


S2 : I’m a student. I’m twelve years old.
I’m (Lan). . . .


<b>B. Presentation</b>


* Dialogue build
Class: What is this?


Teacher : It’s a door.


Class: How do you spell it?
Teacher: D – O – O – R


* Picture drill to Pre- teach Vocabulary.
( C2 – P. 28 )


a door , a window , a board , a clock ,
a waste basket , a school bag, a pencil,
a pen , a ruler , an eraser


* Check Vo : What and where


* Model sentences:
T: What is this ?
Ss : It’s a door


=> What is this? ( Đây là cái gì?)
What is that? Kia là cái gì )
Trả lời : It’s + a/an + tên đồ vật


<b>C. Practice </b>


1 Speaking :
2. Wordsquare


W P E N S C E X


O E D D C L R D



D N E O H O A R


N C S O O C S A


I I K R O K E O


W L R U L E R B


Answer: ˆˆ pen(s) , ruler
window , board
pencil, pen, desk, door,
school, clock, eraser.


<b>D. Further practice</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

<i><b></b></i>
---them down the column of their team


-The team which has more words will
win the game.


- Divide the class into 2 teams.
- Write 10 numbers on the board ,
Tell Ss each number is for a question
but three of them are lucky numbers. If
Ss choose a lucky number, they do not
need to answer any question but they
get 2 points and they can choose
another number.



- Let Ss play the game


* Lucky numbers


1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
3,7,9 are lucky numbers


1. How do you spell ‘DESK’?


2. How do you spell ‘CLASSROOM’?
4. How do you spell ‘CLOCK’?


5. How do you spell ‘PENCIL’?
6. How do you spell ‘RULER’?
8. How do you spell ‘ERASER’?
10. How do you spell ‘WINDOW’?
*.


HOME WORK: - Learn structures and dialogue by heart.


- Do exercise in workbook & Prepare next part C2 –C4


<i>Date of preparation: 10/9/2010 Week : 5</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> </i>
<i>Period : 13</i>



<b> </b>UNIT 3<b>: AT HOME</b>


<i><b>Lesson 1- Section A : MY HOUSE (1,2)</b></i>


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, teacher help students to say what things
are, ask and answer about things in the house


<b>II Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : What are these / those ?
They are = they’re………


 Vocabulary : lamp, bookshelf, telephone, television, chair, living room, stool,
armchair, table, stereo, couch, these, those


<b>III. Techniques</b><i><b> : pair work ; chatting</b></i>


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash cards
<b>V- Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. <b>Warm up :</b> - Chatting


T : show something in class and ask


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<b>B .Presentation </b>


- Use pictures to present new words


- Read the new words.


Ss:- listen & repeat
- read in chorus
- read individual


- Play the tape again and let Ss
repeat


Ss : - Repeat after teacher .
<b>-</b> Listen and copy down.


<b>-</b> Repeat (chorus) ,then work in
pairs.


T : explain new structures, how to
use the plural form of verb “ be “ and
“ noun “ to practice the plural from
Ss : copy down


- practice in pairs to ask and answer
about things in the pictures


<b>C. Practice :</b>


T :asks Ss to practice asking and
answering the questions about things
in the picture


Sts : practice in pairs


D. <b>Consolidation:</b>


<b>-</b> It’s a ruler.
<b></b>


<i><b>-1. Listen and repeat :</b></i>


<b>{ Vocabulary :</b>


- living-room ( n ) : phòng khách
- telephone ( n ) : diện thoại
- lamp ( n ) :đèn đọc sách
- bookshelf ( n ) : kệ sách
- armchair ( n ) : ghế bành


- couch ( n ) : ghế sa lông dài
- table ( n ) : baøn


- television ( n ) : tivi


- stereo ( n ) : máy nghe nhạc
- chair ( n ) : ghế dựa


- stool ( n ) : ghế đẩu
* Check Vo: Rub out and remember


<b>{ Structure :</b>


<b>* What is this / that ? – It’s a / an……</b>



is <sub></sub> are
this <sub></sub> these
that  those


it <sub></sub> they


<b>* What are these / those ?</b>
<b>They are + plural noun</b>


Ex : What are these ?
They are stools
What are those ?
They are armchairs


<i><b>2. Practice with a partner :</b></i>
a. What are these ?


They are stools .
b. What is this ?
It’s a table


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

<i><b></b></i>
---T: reminds Ss the way to ask about


things


Sts : ask and answer.


c. What is that ?


It’s a clock.


<i><b>* . HOMEWORK </b></i>


- Learn by heart all the new words& structures
- Prepare unit 3 ( A3- A6)


<i>Date of preparation: 10/9/2010 Week : 5</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> </i>
<i>Period : 14</i>


UNIT 3<b>: AT HOME</b>


<i><b>Lesson 2- Section A : MY HOUSE (3,4,5,6)</b></i>


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about the
relationship in the family


<b>II Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : How many people are there in your family?
There are………people……


Possessive adjectives


 Vocabulary : teacher, brother, sister, mother, father, family, people, his , her



<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids </b>: pictures ; cassette, flash card
<b>V/ Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


T :Use method “ Noughts and
crosses”


Sts : do as directed


  


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

<b>B. Presentation</b> <b>:</b>


T: use pictures of family and tell
them about the relationship in a
family and then present new
words


<b>-</b> read the new words.
Ss : - Repeat after teacher
<b>-</b> Listen and copy down.
<b>-</b> Read individual


-Play the tape again and let Ss
repeat



<b>-</b> Repeat (chorus) then work in
pairs.


T: give some possessive
adjectives


Ss : listen and copy down


T : explain the questions to ask
Who this is / How many people….
Sts : copy down


<b></b>


<b> Vocabulary :</b>


<b>-</b> family ( n ) : gia đình
<b>-</b> father ( n ) : boá
<b>-</b> mother ( n ) :meï


<b>-</b> brother ( n ) : anh em trai
<b>-</b> sister ( n ) : chị em gái
<b>-</b> people ( n ) : người


<b>-</b> she ( pron ) : cô ấy, chị ấy
<b>-</b> he ( pron. ) : anh ấy , ông aáy
<b>-</b> his : cuûa anh aáy
<b>-</b> her : cuûa chị ấy



<b>Possessive adjectives : ( Tính từ sở hữu )</b>


I <sub></sub> my : của tôi
He <sub></sub> his : của anh ấy
She <sub></sub> her: của chị ấy


You <sub></sub> your: của bạn, của các bạn
Sau tính từ sở hữu ln có danh từ đi kèm :
VD : My book ; his name ; her ruler


<b> Structure :</b>


<i><b>1.Hỏi người đó là ai, người kia là ai :</b></i>


<b>Who is that ? / Who is that ?</b>


<b>That’ s / this is ……… It’s + name </b>


Ex : Who is this ?
This is Hoa


<i><b>2.Hỏi có bao nhiêu người trong gia đình của </b></i>


<i><b>baïn: </b></i><b>How many people are there in your </b>


<b>family?</b>


<b>There are + number + people</b>


Ex : How many people are there in your


family ? - There are five people.


<i><b>3.Giới thiệu về nghề nghiệp :</b></i>


<b>S + to be + noun ( ngheà )</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---C. Practice : </b>


T :ask Ss to practice asking and
answering the questions about
name, people, age


Sts : practice in pairs
D<b>. Consolidation</b> :


T: reminds Ss Remember


Sts copy Remember in the text
books.(page 34 )


Ex : She is a teacher.


<b>* Answer the questions (A4) :</b>


a. Her name is Nga
b. His name is Ha


c. That is Ba. He is twelve.


d. This is Lan. She is fifteen.
<b>Remember</b>


<i><b>* . HOMEWORK </b></i>


- Answer about their name, old, how many people there are in their family.
- Prepare unit 3 (B1,2)


<i>Date of preparation: 10/9/2010 </i> <i> Week : 5</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 15</i>


UNIT 3<b>: AT HOME</b>


<i><b>Lesson 3- Section B : NUMBERS(1,2)</b></i>


<b>I</b> <b>/ Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask about quantity
of things and how to use singular nouns and plural nouns


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : How many books are there ?
There is one/ There are two
 Vocabulary : cardinal number 1 – 100, bench


<b>III. Techniques</b><i><b> : pair work ; chatting</b></i>


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card



<b>V/ Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


A. Warm up :


T : Let Ss play “ Bingo “ with
cardinal numbers from 1-20
Sts : play as the direction


B. Presentation :


<b>2</b> <b>5</b> <b>7</b> <b>9</b> <b>13</b>


<b>4</b> <b>6</b> <b>8</b> <b>10</b> <b>14</b>


<b>15</b> <b>16</b> <b>17</b> <b>18</b> <b>19</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

T: Introduce the cardinal numbers
from one to one hundred.


- Mention the difference between
1-10 and 10 – 20 and the main
stressed syllables of the numbers.
Ss : listen


T: let Ss listen to the cassette,
repeat and count by themselves.
Ss: do as directed.



T : explain how to form the plural
nouns


Ss: listen and copy down


C. Practice :


T: show the picture and let Ss
count things in it .


Sts : count


D. Consolidation :


T: give some single nouns and get
Ss to change into plural nouns
Ss : do their task


<b> Vocabulary :</b>


<b>-</b> 30 thirty 61 sixty-one
<b>-</b> 40 forty 76 seventy-six
<b>-</b> 50 fifty 82 eighty-two
<b>-</b> 60 sixty


<b>-</b> 70 seventy
<b>-</b> 080 eighty
<b>-</b> 90 ninety



<b>-</b> 100 one hundred


<b> Structure : Cách thành lập danh từ số </b>


<b>nhieàu</b>


 Thêm “s” vào sau danh từ số ít


Ex : a door <sub></sub> doors a chair <sub></sub> two chairs
 Danh từ tận cùng là ch, sh, x,s,o, thêm


“es”


Ex : a bench <sub></sub> benches a couch <sub></sub> six
couches


 Danh từ tận cùng là F, FE thì đổi thành
F, FE thành VES


Ex : a shelf <sub></sub> three shelves


 Danh từ tận cùng là “y” trước “y” là phụ
âm thì đổi “y “ thành IES


Ex : a family <sub></sub> families
<i><b>2. Practice :</b></i>


1 door 1 table
2 students 1 board
2 books 1 erase


1 window 1 chair
1 check 5 desks
1 ruler 2 benches
Bus <sub></sub> buses


Leaf <sub></sub> leaves
Dish <sub></sub> dishes
Stool <sub></sub> stools


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

<i><b></b></i>
<i><b>---* . HOMEWORK </b></i>


- Learn by heart the cardinal numbers
- Prepare unit 3 (B 3-6)


<b> </b>


<i>Date of preparation: 17/9/2010 </i> <i> Week : 6</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 16</i>


UNIT 3<b>: AT HOME</b>


<i><b>Lesson 4- Section B : NUMBERS(3,4,5,6)</b></i>


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask about quantity
of things and how to use singular nouns and plural nouns



<b>II/ Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : How many books are there ?
There is one/ There are two
 Vocabulary: cardinal number 1 – 100, bench


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, chain game


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<b>V/ Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Use the method “ chain game”
Ss : do as the direction


<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Remind the question with How
many


Ss : listen and copy down


* Chain game:


T: in my classroom, there is a board.



P1 : in my classroom , there is a board and a
door.


P2 : in my classroom, there is a board and a
door. They are very big…


<i><b>3. Listen and repeat :</b></i>
<b> Structure : </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

- Give an example , then ask Ss to
give some others


T : play the tape


Ss : listen and repeat the modals


<b>C. Practice </b> :


- Ask Ss to ask and answer the
questions about things in class
Ss : practice


- Show the picture and let Ss
count things in it .


Ss : count


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss the question with


How many…..


Ss copy down


- If having time , let Ss play game
“ Survey”


Example exchanges:


S1: How many people are there in
your family?


S2: Three


<b>There are ………..</b>
<b>There is one. </b>


Ex : How many doors are there ?
There is one.


How many tables are there?
There are twelve.


<i><b>4. Practice with a partner :</b></i>
How many desks are there ?
There is one .


How many benches are there ?
There are twelve.



……


<i><b>5. Practice</b></i><b> : </b>


1 couch 1 stereo
1 lamp 1 table
1 telephone 2 chairs
2 armchairs 4 people
3 books 1 television


<i><b> 6. Remember</b></i><b> :</b>


How many…………are there ?
There is ………/ There are ………
<i><b>* Survey</b></i>


In


y


ou


r f


am


ily


? Name Hoa



People 4


In


y


ou


r h


ou


se


? Chairs


Lamps
Tables
Television


Desks
Windows


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

<i><b></b></i>


---In


y


ou



r c


la


ss


ro


om


? Fans


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : Learn by heart all the nouns above</b></i>


<i>Date of preparation: 17/9/2010 </i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 6</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 17 </i>


UNIT 3<b>: AT HOME</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5- Section C : FAMILIES(1,2,3,4,)</b></i>


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to tell about their
families members of their families and their occupation. They can ask and answer
their friends to get some information.


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>



 Grammar : What do they do ? – They are students
What does he do? – He is an engineer
 Vocabulary: engineer, doctor, nurse


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, chain game


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<b>V/ Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Gets Ss to make sentences by
the word given


Ss : make sentences


<b>B. Presentation</b> :


* Writing


1. many / students / How / there / are ?
Are / There / forty-five


2. many / desks / How / are / there ?
Eight / there / are


1.Listen and read. Then answer the questions



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

- Introduce the situation of the
text and give guiding questions
then let Ss to listen to the tape.
Ss : listen


- Play the tape again and let Ss to
repeat after the tape.


Ss : listen and repeat


T: give meaning of the word and
the question


Ss : listen and copy


<b>C. Practice :</b>


- Ask Ss to ask and answer the
questions


Ss : practice ( pair work )
After asking and answering, T
gives the correct answers.
Ss : check and copy down


- Get Ss to look at the picture of
Song ‘s family ask about their
occupation



Ss : listen and copy down – repeat
T: ask Ss to ask and answer
Song’s family in pairs


Ss : practice ( pair work )


After asking and answering, T
gives the correct answers.


Ss : check and copy down


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


-Remind Ss the usage of
possessive adjectives


1. How many people are there in this family?
2. How old is his mother ?


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


<b>-</b> engineer ( picture) : kỹ sư
<b>-</b> doctor (picture) bác só
<b>-</b> nurse ( picture) y tá


<b> Structure : Hỏi nghề nghiệp</b>


<b>What does he do ? – He is a/an + Noun</b>


Ex : what does he do ? – He is an engineer.



<b>Where + be + S ? – S + be + place</b>


Ex : Where is he ? – He is in the living room


<b>* Answer :</b>


a. There are four people.
b. He is forty.


c. He is an engineer.
d. She is thirty-five
e. She is a teacher.
f. Her brother is eight.
g. He is a student.


h. They are in the living-room.
<i><b>2. Practice with a partner :</b></i>
S1 : This is his father, Mr. Kien
S2 : What does he do ?


S1: He is a doctor.
S2 : How old is he ?
S1 :He is a doctor.


<b>4. Remember : </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

<i><b></b></i>
---Ss : listen and copy down



- Gets Ss to ask and answer about
occupation


Ss : ask and answer


we - our
she - her
he - his
it - its


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn by heart all the possessive adjectives </b></i>


- Write the correct answer in their notebooks. Do exercises


<i><b>TEST 15 MINUTES</b></i>
<i><b>I/ Nối câu hỏi với câu trả lời đúng của nó : ( 5điểm )</b></i>
1. What does he do? ……a. He is forty


2. How many people are ……b. I’m fine . Thanks.
there in your family ? ……c. There are five people


3. How old is your brother ? ……d. They are in the living room.
4. Where are they ? ……e. He is a doctor.


5. How are you ?


<i><b>II/ Chọn câu trả lời đúng nhất : ( 5 điểm ) </b></i>
1. Chúc ai ngủ ngon, em sẽ nói :


a. Good evening b. You are good night c. Good night


2. Chọn câu đúng :


a. I’m student b. I’m a student. C. I’m an student
3. Chọn câu đúng :


a. Where you live ? b. Where are you live ?
c. Where do you live ?


4. I live ………Tran Phu Street.


a. on b. in c. at
5. ………do you spell your name ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

<i>Date of preparation: 17/9/2010 </i> <i> Week : 6</i>
<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 18 </i>


UNIT 3<b>: AT HOME</b>


<i><b>Lesson 6 : GRAMMAR PRACTICE (1,2,3,4,)</b></i>


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to furter practice in
“BE” , Imperatives, Numbers, Questions words, There is / There are, and furniture
vocabulary.


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : What do they do ? – They are students
What does he do? – He is an engineer


 Vocabulary: engineer, doctor, nurse


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, chain game


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<b>V/ Procedures </b>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Ask Ss to write all the form of to
be


Ss : write


<b> B. Presentation</b> :
- Review the verb “ to be”
Ss: Listen & copy


* Network
am


is


* <b>TO BE :</b> are


<i><b>Theå khẳng định : </b></i><b>S + be</b>



I <sub></sub> am
We / you / they <sub></sub> are
LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

<i><b></b></i>


--- Guide Ss to do exercises
Ss : do exercises


<b> C. Practice</b> :


- Review the imperative
Ss : listen and do exercises
- Remind Ss the old lesson and
ask Ss to answer the questions
Ss : listen and answer


- Get Ss to fill in the blanks the
questions words


Ss : fill in the blanks


- Get Ss to write the words for the
numbers and the numbers for the
words


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to
complete the dialogues
Ss: work in pairs



She / he / it <sub></sub> is


<i><b>Thể phủ định : </b></i><b>S + be not</b>


am not ; is not = isn’t ; are not = aren’t
Ex : She is not a teacher.


<i><b>Thể nghi vấn: </b></i><b>Be + S….. ?</b>


Ex : Is she a teacher ?


<b>1.</b> <b>Tobe :</b>


Am / am / are / is / are


<b>2. To be :</b>


Am/ is / is / are / are


<b>3. Tobe :</b>


a) are / am b) is / is


c) is / isn’t d) are / aren’t


<b> 4. Imperative ( command ) :</b>


a. in b. down c. your
d. your e. up



<b>5. How many .. ..?</b>


<i><b>How many + N( plural nouns ) are there ?</b></i>
a. There is one


b. There are six.
c. There are two.
d. There ia one .


<b>6. Question words :</b>


a) What / is c) Where / live
b) Who / is d) What / is


<b>7. Numbers:</b>


a. five / eight / ten / twenty / thirty / fifty …
b.7,9,11, . . .


<b>8. Greetings :</b>


Hello/ Hi / How / five / you / thanks


<b>9. This and That :</b>


a. What is that ? Is it a desk ?
- Yes, it is.


b. This – is - isn’t



<b>10. A picture quiz :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

- Get Ss to complete the picture
quiz.


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :
T : remind the knowledge


2. BOOK 7. BOARD


3. ERASER 5. DOOR
4. RULER


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Write all the answer in their notebook.</b></i>


- Prepare one period test


<i>Date of preparation: 24/9/2010 </i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 7</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 19 </i>


<b>TEST ONE PERIOD</b>


<i><b>I/ Chọn từ đúng để hoàn thành câu : ( 3ms )</b></i>


1. Her mother ………36 years old 2. …………. is that ? – It’s a pen


a) is b) are c) am a) What b) Where c) Who



3. What does he do? – He is …...enginner. 4. What are ………..? – They ‘re chairs


a) a b) an c) one a) this b) that c)


those


5. How are you ? - ………. 6. How many………are there ?


a) I’m fine b) I’m Peter c) I’m five a) student b) students c) desk
<i><b>II/ Hãy nghe và điền từ đúng vào trong đoạn hội thoại sau đây : ( 2 ms )</b></i>


Miss Lan : Good morning, children.
Students : …………(1 )……, Miss Lan.
Miss Lan : How ……( 2 )…..you ?


Students : We’re ……( 3 )……, thank you. How are you ?
Miss Lan : Fine, thanks. ……( 4 )………


Students : Bye.


<i><b>III/ Viết câu hỏi cho các câu trả lời sau : ( 1m )</b></i>
1. ……… ? – My name is Nga


2. ……… ? – He is twelve years old.
<i><b>IV / Viết những con số sau đây bằng chữ : ( 1,5ms )</b></i>


16……… 12………. 78………..


<i><b>V/ Đọc đoạn và trả lời câu hỏi : ( 2,5ms )</b></i>



This is Mai. She is twelve years old and she is a student. There are five
people in her family. Her father is fifty-one and he is a doctor. Her mother is
forty-eight and she is a teacher. Her brother is sixteen. Her sister is forty-eight. They are
students.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<i><b></b></i>


---2. How old is her father ? ………


3. What does he do ? ……….


4. What does her mother do ? ………
5. What does her brother do ? ………


<b>KEY : I/ </b>1 – a ; 2 – a ; 3 – b ; 4 – c ; 5 – a ; 6 - b


<b>II</b> / 1 – Good morning ; 2 – are ; 3 – fine 4 – Goodbye


<b>III</b> / 1. What’s your name ? 2 . How old is he ?


<b>IV</b> / 1 – sixteen 2 – twelve 3 – seventy-eight


V / 1. There are four people in her family. 5. He is s student.
2. He is fifty-one years old.


3. He is a doctor. 4. She is a teacher.


<i>Date of preparation: 24/9/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 7</i>



<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 20 </i>


UNIT 4<b>: BIG OR SMALL?</b>


<i><b>Lesson 1 : Section A – WHERE IS YOUR SCHOOL?(1,2,)</b></i>


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer
about places, location, characteristics, especially reading a description of a school
with practice in possessive “S” to talk about possessions.


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : Where’s Phong’s school?
It’s in the city


It’s big/ small
Possessive case


 Vocabulary : big, small, country, on, in, or


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<b>V/ Procedures </b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>



- Stick 2 pictures on the board and
get Ss look at then remark


Ss do as directed.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


- Show 2 pictures to introduce the
model sentences


- Explain about the Possessive case
and position of adjectives


Ss : listen and copy down


<b> C. Practice : </b>


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again
and repeat after.


Ss : listen and repeat in chorus
Read in pairs



- Remind Ss Yes / No - questions
and let them work in pairs to ask
and answer the questions


Ss : practice ( pair work )


After asking and answering, T gives
the correct answers.


Ss : check and copy down


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss the usage of possessive
case and hang flip chart on the
board.


- Model a sentence, and then ask Ss


<i><b>1. Listen and repeat</b></i>
<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- small # big ( realia ) : nhỏ # lớn
- country ( n ) : nông thôn
- in the country : ở nông thôn
- in the city : ở thành phố
<b> Model sentences </b>


<b>-</b> Is Phong’s school small?


<b>-</b> Yes, it is.


<b>-</b> Is Thu’s school small?
<b>-</b> No it isn’t.


<b> Possessive case : </b>


<b>Noun’s noun</b>


Ex : Hoa ‘s ruler


My father’s house
<b> Position of adjective : </b>


<b>S + be + adj</b>


Ex : Tuan’s school is big


<b>It is a / an + adj + noun</b>


Ex : It is a small house


<i><b>2. Answer :</b></i>
a. Yes, it is.
b. No, it isn’t.


c. It is in the country.
d. No, it isn’t.


* Yes/ No question Answer Drill.


- Phong’s school.


- Thu’s school. big / small?
- Your school. in the city / in the country?
- Your house.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<i><b></b></i>
---to practice in pairs.


- Observe and remark. - Your sister’s school.Example exchange:


S1 : Is Phong’s school big?
S2: No, it isn’t.


S1: Is it in the country?
S2 : Yes, it is.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Write all the answer in their notebooks.</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 4: A3-A6
- Write about their school


<i>Date of preparation: 24/9/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 7</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 21</i>


UNIT 4<b>: BIG OR SMALL?</b>



<i><b>Lesson 2 : Section A – WHERE IS YOUR SCHOOL?(3,4,5,6)</b></i>


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer
about places, location, characteristics.Especially reading a text about school to
understand details and get further practice in numbers and school vocabulary.


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : How many ……….are there?


 Vocabulary : classroom, student, book, desk, hundred


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<b>V/ Procedures </b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up: </b>


- Ask Ss some questions about their
school?


Ss answer


<b>B. Pre- reading</b> :


- Hang the poster on the board



- Ss: guess what these numbers are
about , to do with school


- Give or remind some words


<i><b>* Chatting</b></i>


1 . Where is your school ?
2 . Is your school small ?
<i><b>* Open- prediction</b></i>


* Vocabulary:


- classroom ( pict./ realia)
- student (realia)


- book (realia)
<b>Classrooms</b> <b>Students</b>


<i><b>Phong’s</b></i>
<i><b>school</b></i>


8 400


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

- Remind the way to use “How
many….”


<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and


check their prediction.


- Remind Ss “How many” and let Ss
work in pair to ask and answer the
questions


Ss : practice ( pair work )


After asking and answering, T gives
the correct answers.


Ss : check and copy down


- Ask Ss to depend on whether Ss
live in the city or in the country
- Ss: take one of the texts in A3 –
P.45 and rewrite it according to their
own school


- Turn on the tape.
- Ss: - Listen & read
- Listen & reapeat


- Call some good Ss to read aloud
- Correct the mistakes


<b> D. Consolidation</b> :


T: remind Ss the usage of
possessive case and answer some


question about their school


Sts : listen and answer


- desk (realia)


- hundred (mime / pict.)
<i><b>*Structure:</b></i>


How many ………..are there ?
<i><b>3. Read. Then answer the questions : </b></i>
* Listen & check


* Answer the questions


a.There are eight classrooms in Phong’s
school.


b. There are four hundred students in his
school.


c.There are twenty classrooms in Thu’s
school.


d. There are nine hundred students in her
school.


<i><b>4. Answer : </b></i>
Ex:



a. My school is in the country.
b. There are eleven classrooms.


c. There are nine hundred students in my
school


<i><b>5.Play with words </b></i>


<i><b>6. Remember :</b></i>


Where is ….. ? = Where’s …..?
Is it ………?


Yes, it is / No. it isn’t


How many ………are there ………..?
It is big


It is small.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>---* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Write about their own school</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 4: B


<i>Date of preparation: 02/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 8</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>



<i> Period : 22 </i>


UNIT 4<b>: BIG OR SMALL?</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3 : Section B – MY CLASS</b></i>


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask their friends
about their classes grades the number of the class, the floor of the school.


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : Which grade / class are you in ?
I’m in grade 6/ class 6c.


How many floors…?
 Vocabulary : grade, first, floor, second


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<b>V/ Procedures </b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> :


- Hang picture and get Ss to answer
the questions


Ss: do as directed.



<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen one
time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


T : explain about the question and
give an example.


* Chatting


1. Is it Phong’s school or Thu’s school?
- It’s Phong’s school.


2. How many floors does it have ?
-There are two


<i><b>1. Listen and repeat. Then practice the </b></i>
<i><b>dialogue with a partner: </b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- grade ( n ) : lớp , khối lớp
- Which grade………? : khối nào



- Which class ……….? : lớp nào
- Floor ( n ) (pict.) : tầng ( lầu )
- have / has ( v ) : có


- first : thứ nhất
- Second : thứ hai
<b> Hỏi học ở lớp nào :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

Ss: Listen, copy and give other
examples


- Introduce about ordinal numbers to
tenth


Ss : listen and copy down


<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and
repeat after.


Ss : listen and repeat in chorus then
practice in pairs


- Hang the poster on the board


- Have Ss complete the table in groups
Ss : practice ( group work )


- Have Ss write three sentences about


themselves


Ss : write


- Hang the poster of the open dialogue
and get Ss to complete it.


Ss: work in pairs and complete.
- Call some pairs topractice before
class.


<b> D. Consolidation : </b>


- Have Ss talk about themselves: their
school, their class. . . .


Ss : free talk


- Remind Ss the ordinal number,
And some questions in Remember
Ss: Listen , answer & remember


<i><b>S + be + in grade ……….</b></i>
Ex: Which grade are you in?


Ss : I’m in grade 6
<b> Số thứ tự :</b>


1st <sub>: first 2 </sub>nd <sub> : second</sub>
3 rd<sub> : third 4 </sub>th <sub> : fourth</sub>


5 th <sub> : fifth 6 </sub>th<sub> : sixth</sub>
7 th<sub> : seventh 8</sub>th <sub> : eighth</sub>
9th <sub> : ninth 10</sub>th <sub> : tenth</sub>
* <b>Dialogue , page 47</b>


2. Complete the table :


<b>Name Grade</b> <b>Class</b>


<b>Classroom’s</b>
<b>floor</b>


<b>Thu</b> 7 7C 2nd


<i><b>Phong</b></i> 6 6A 1st


<i><b>You </b></i> 6 6 B 1st


<i><b>3. Write :</b></i>


Ex: I’m in grade 6.
I’m in class 6A


My classroom is on the first floor.
<i><b>5. Complete the dialogue :</b></i>


Thu : Is your school big ?
Phong : No, it <b>isn’t</b>.


Thu : How many floors <b>does</b> it have ?


Phong : It <b>has</b> two floors.


Thu : Which class <b>are</b> you in ?
Phong : I’<b>m</b> in class 6A.


Thu : Where <b>is</b> your classroom ?
Phong : It ‘s on the first floor.
<i><b>6. Remember :</b></i>


Ordinal numbers : 1st<sub> to 10</sub>th
How many……….?


Which grade / class / floor …………..?
Where‘s = where is …………?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>---* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Write about their own school</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 4: C 1(a) + C2


<i>Date of preparation: 02/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 8</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 23 </i>


UNIT 4<b>: BIG OR SMALL?</b>


<i><b>Lesson 4 : Section C – GETTING READY FOR SCHOOL(1a +2)</b></i>



<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer
about their routine, time and know about Simple Present Tense, positive statements
with “I” and vocabulary of routines to talk about habitual actions.


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : What do you do every morning ?
– I get up


 Vocabulary : get up, get dressed, brush, teeth, wash, face, have/has, breakfast,
go


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<b>V/ Procedures </b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Get Ss to write some activities in a
day in Vietnamese


Ss do as directed.


<b>B. Presentation</b> :


T: play the tape and ask Ss to listen


one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


* Network


Đánh răng rửa mặt
ăn sáng


Thức dậy đi học


<i><b>1. Listen and repeat. What do you do in the</b></i>
<i><b>morning?</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- get up ( v ) (mime/ pict) : thức dậy
- get dressed ( v)(pict.) : mặc quần áo
- brush ( v ) (pict.) : đáng/ chải ( răng )
- wash ( v ) (pict.) : rửa ( mặt )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

Ss :- listen guess the meaning
- copy down


- repeat


- read individual.



T : explain about the present simple
tense


Ss : listen and copy down


- Get Ss to listen and repeat after the
tape.


Ss : read in chorus - individual


<b>C. Practice </b>


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask and
answer the question


Ss : do as directed




<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Have Ss talk about themselves
Ss : free talk


- go ( v ) (mime) : ñi
* Check Vo: Slap the board


<b> The present simple tense :</b>
<i><b>S + V + O</b></i>



S : chủ ngữ V: động từ O : tân ngữ
Ex : I get up


I go to school.


<b>*Model sentences:</b>


What do you do in the morning?
I get up.


brush my teeth.
have breakfast.
………..


<i><b>2. Practice with a partner : </b></i>
<i><b>* </b></i><b>Word cue drill.</b>


S1 : What do you do in the morning ?
S2 : I get up.


S1: What do you do (then)?
S2: I get dressed.


…………..


<b>* Chain game:</b>


S1: I get up.



S2: I get up and I brush my teeth


S3: I get up, I brush my teeth and I get
dressed.


S4: etc.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Write about their own school</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 4: <b>C1-b , C3</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 02/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 8</i>


LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

<i><b></b></i>


<i>---Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 24 </i>


UNIT 4<b>: BIG OR SMALL?</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5 : Section C – GETTING READY FOR SCHOOL(</b></i><b>1b - 3</b>)


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer
about their routine, time and know about Simple Present Tense, positive statements
with “he/ she” to talk about habitual actions.


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>



 Grammar : What does he do every morning ?
– He gets up


 Vocabulary : get up, get dressed, brush, teeth, wash, face, have/has, breakfast,
go


<b>III. Techniques :</b>slap the board pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> :


- Have some questions and ask Ss to
answer about themselves


Ss do as directed.


<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Review some new word by using


matching method. ( using pictures)
to match


T : explain about the present simple
tense


Ss : listen and copy down


- Get Ss to listen and repeat after
the tape.


*Chatting


<b>Questions :</b>


1. What do you do in the morning?
2. What do you do in the afternoon
3. What do you do in the evening ?
<i><b>1. Listen and repeat. What does he do in the </b></i>
<i><b>morning?</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : (Review)</b>
- get up ( v )


- get dressed ( v )
- brush ( v )
- wash ( v )
- have / has ( v )
- go ( v )



<b> The present simple tense :</b>


<i><b>S + V-s/ es + O</b></i>


S : chủ ngữ V: động từ O : tân ngữ
Ex : He gets up


He go<b>es</b> to school.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

Ss : read in chorus - individual




<b>C. Practice :</b>


- Hang the posters on the board and
ask Ss to practice in pairs.


- Ask Ss to practice in groups to
write five sentences about Ba
Ss : do as directed




<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Hang the poster on the board


- Have some sentences and have Ss


give the correct form of the verbs
Ss : free talk


he
she
gets up


Ba brushes his / her teeth.
He has breakfast.
She goes to school.
<i><b>* Mapped dialogue</b></i>


S1: What does be do S2: He gets up.
in the morning?


S1: What does be do S2: He ………
then?


S1: ……..
<i><b>3. Write : </b></i>


Every morning, Ba gets up. He gets dressed.
He brushes his teeth. He washes his face. He
has breakfast. Then he goes to school


<i><b>* </b></i><b>Give the correct form of the verbs :</b>


Nga ( live ) lives in the city. Every morning
she (get) gets up at 6.00. She ( brush )
<i><b>brushes her teeth. She ( wash ) washes her</b></i>


face. She ( have ) has a big breakfast. Then
she ( get ) gets dressed. She ( go ) goes to
school at 6.30. She ( be ) is in grade 6. Her
classroom is on the second floor. It ( be ) is
big. There are 45 students in her class. She
(love) loves their friends and teachers very
much.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK : </b><b> Write about their own activities</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 4: <b>C4, C5, C6, C7, C8</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 08/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 9</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 25</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>---Lesson 6 : Section C – GETTING READY FOR SCHOOL(</b></i><b>4-8</b>)


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer
about the time


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : What time is it ? – It’s one o’clock.
What time do you get up ?



What time dose he get up?
 Vocabulary : o’clock, quarter, half , past, to


<b>III. Techniques : </b>slap the board pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and Students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Get Ss to play matching with the
words given


Ss do as directed.


<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


- Read the new words aloud


- Repeat


- Read individual
- Correct the mistakes


- Explain about the way to tell time
and read


Ss : listen and copy down


- Show at the clock and ask the time


<i><b>*Matching</b></i>


Go my face
Have to school
Get breakfast
Wash up


Get one’s teeth
Brush dressed


<i><b>4. Listen and repeat. Then practice the </b></i>
<i><b>dialogue with a partner:</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- the time ( n ) (expl.) : thời gian
- late ( a ) (example): trễ, muộn
=> to be late for school : trễ học


- (ten) o’clock (realia) : (10) giờ đúng
- half past (ten)(realia) : (10) giờ rưỡi/ 30’
* Check Vo: What and Where


<i><b>5. Listen and repeat. </b></i>
<i><b> What time is it ? </b></i>


<b> Vocabulary </b>Để hỏi giờ:What time is it ?


<i>*Cách trả lời giờ đúng </i><b>: It’s + ……o’clock.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

Ss : anwer


- Play the tape and let Ss repeat
Ss : - listen and repeat


- read individual
- Read the sentences


Ss : repeat


- Give the modal sentence to talk the
time for working.


<b>C. Practice </b>


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask
and answer the questions


Ss : do as directed



<b> D. Consolidation : </b>


-Have Ss talk about themselves
Ss : free talk


- Have Ss play the game “ Nought
and crosses “ if having time


Ss do as the teacher says


<i>* Cách trả lời giờ hơn</i> :
It’s + phút + giờ
Ex : It’s twenty five .


It’s + giờ + past + phút
Ex : It’s five past twenty.


<i>* Cách trả lời giờ kém</i> :


<b> It’s + giờ + to + phút</b>


Ex : It’s twenty to five
 a quarter : ¼ = 15 phút
 half past : ½ = 30 phuùt
<i><b>6. Read :</b></i>


Form : <b>S + V + O + at + time</b>


Ex : He gets up at six.



I have breakfast at half past six.
<i><b>7. Answer. Then write the answers :</b></i>
a. I get up at six ten.


b. I have breakfast at seven o’clock.
c. I go to school at half past twelve.
<i><b>8. Remember : (Page 51)</b></i>


* Noughts and Crosses


6.10 6.30 6.45


7.00 11.00 11.30


3.15 4.20 5.30


Ex: S1: What’s the time?
S2: ( It’s six ten)


<i><b>* HOMEWORK : </b><b> Write about their own activities</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 5: <b>A1, A2</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 08/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 9</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 26 </i>



UNIT 5<b>: THINGS I DO</b>


<i><b>Lesson 1 : Section A – MY DAY(</b></i><b>1,2</b>)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk and answer
about daily routine.


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : What does Nga do every morning ?
 Vocabulary : homework, game, play


<b>III. Techniques :</b>Rub out and remember; pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up : </b>


- Ask Ss to choose a time and
complete the sentence


<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Play the tape and ask Ss to


listen one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


- Read the new words aloud
Ss: listen and copy down
-repeat


- read individual


- Play the tape again and get Ss
to repeat


Ss : do as directed


- Guide Ss to give the model
sentences.


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs in
order to ask and answer the
questions on page 53


* Guessing game


Example Exchange
S1: Is it half past eight?
S2: No, it isn’t.



S1: Is it nine fifteen?
S2: Yes, it is.


<i><b>1. Listen and repeat. Then practice with a</b></i>
<i><b>partner:</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- every ( adv ) (trans.) : mỗi
- everyday ( adv ) : mỗi ngày


- play games ( v )(pict.) : chơi trò chơi
- do one’s homework : làm bài tập về nhà
* Check Vo: Rub out and remember.


<i><b>* Model sentences</b></i>


Everyday I go to school.
she goes


<i><b>2. Ask and answer with partner : . </b></i>
<i><b>* Comprehension question (p.53)</b></i>
a) Everyday, Nga gets up at six.


b) Every morning, Nga goes to school.
activities


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

Ss : do as directed


- Give the correct answers.



<b> C. Practice </b>


- Ask Ss to look at their books on
page 52 and resay what T reads
as the model sentence.


- Ss : do as the teacher says.


<b> </b>


<b> D. Consolidation : </b>


- Have Ss talk about themselves
Ss : free talk


c) Every afternoon, Nga plays games


d) Every evening, Nga does her homework.
<i><b>* Substitution drill.</b></i>


Teacher: Students:
Everyday<i>I get</i> up at 6 Everyday<i>Nga gets</i> up at 6
I brush my teeth. She brushes her teeth
I wash my face. She washes her face
I get dressed. etc.


I have breakfast.
I go to school.
I play games.



I do my homework.
<b>TEST 15 MINUTES</b>


<b>Cho thể đúng của động từ trong ngoặc :</b>


1. Every morning , Nga ( go ) …………to school.
2. We (brush)……….our teeth after meals.


3. He ( do ) ………his homework every evening.
4. Hoa and Lan( play) ……….games after school.
5. I (have ) ………lunch at 11:30 everyday.


6. She ( watch ) ……….TV .


7. Her mother ( cook ) ……….meals everyday.
8. His father ( read )………a newspaper.


9. Everyday, Nga ( get ) ………….up at six.
10. His brother( wash)………..his face .


<i><b>* HOMEWORK : </b><b> Write about their own activities</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 5: <b>A3, A4</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 08/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 9</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 27</i>



UNIT 5<b>: THINGS I DO</b>


<i><b>Lesson 2 : Section A – MY DAY(</b></i><b>3,4</b>)


<b>I / Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk and answer
about daily routine.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---II/ Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : What does Nga do every morning ?
What do you do after school ?


 Vocabulary : watch, listen to, music, read, housework,


<b>III. Techniques :</b>slap the board pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up</b> :


- Use the method “Jumble words“
Ss do as diected.



<b>B. Presentation :</b>


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen one
time


Ss : listen


T explain some new words
- Read them aloud


Ss :- listen and copy down – repeat
- read individual


T reads: Every morning Lan gets up
and listens to music. Every afternoon
she comes home and does the
housework. Then she watches TV.
Every evening she reads and does her
homework.


T play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat


Ss : do as directed
- Set the scence


- Give the model sentences.


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs in order to



<i><b>*Jumble words</b></i>
1. mage = game
2. ypal = play
3. subrh = brush
4. ecfa = face


<i><b>1. Listen and repeat. Then practice the</b></i>
<i><b>dialogue with a partner:</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


-(to) watch television (pict.) : xem tivi
-(to) do the housework (pict.) : làm công
việc nhà


- (to) listen to music(pict.): nghe nhạc
- (to) read (pict.) :đọc


<b>* CheckVo: Ordering vocabulary</b>


<i>Answer key</i><b>: </b>(to) listen to music 1


(to) watch TV 3
( to) do the housework 2
( to) read 4


<b> Model sentences </b>


What do you do after school?
<i><b>I watch television.</b></i>



What does Nga do after school?
<i><b>She does the housework.</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

ask and answer the questions on page
53


Ss : do as directed


- Give the correct answers


<b> C. Practice :</b>


- Show the picture on page 53
- Asks Ss to practice in pairs to ask
and answer the questions


Ss : do as directed
- Give correct answers.


<b> D. Consolidation : </b>


- Have Ss use every morning, every
afternoon, every evening in their
questions.


<i><b>* Comprehension question (p.54) </b></i>


a) After school, Lan does the housework.
b) After school Ba watches television.


c) after school, Thu read.


d) After school, Nam listen to music.
<i><b>* Picture drill (A3 – P. 53)</b></i>


* Example exchange:


S1: What does Ba/ Lan/ Nam/ Thu do after
school?


S2: (He watches TV)/ ( She does the house
work) / etc.


<i><b>* Noughts and crosses</b></i>
He/ play


game She/ brush her teeth Lan/ do the housework
Ba/ get


dressed


Nam/ go to
school


Thu/ do her
homework
She/ wash


her face



He/ have
breakfast


Mai / listen
to music
Example exchange:


S1: What does ( Ba do every morning)?
S2: ( She gets dressed)


<i><b>* HOMEWORK : </b><b> Write about their own activities</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 5: <b>A5, A6, A7</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 15/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 10</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 28</i>


UNIT 5<b>: THINGS I DO</b>


<i><b>Lesson 3 : Section A – MY DAY(</b></i><b>5, 6, 7)</b>


<b>I / Objectives</b> :


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to learn how to use simple
present tense : Yes/ No questions and short answers to talk about daily routines


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>



<sub></sub> Grammar : Do you play soccer ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

<i><b></b></i>
- Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.


- No, I don’t play soccer
 Vocabulary : sport, volleyball, soccer


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, Yes/No Question Answer Drill, …………


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up</b> :


- Get Ss to match the words
Ss do as directed.


<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words



Ss : listen , guess the meaning, repeat
, read individual , and then copy
down


- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat , play the roles,and read in
pairs to practice


Ss : do as directed


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again
and then complete the grid.


- Set the scene


- Write the model on the board
- Present how to change the
affimative into negative and
interrogative


<b>* Matching</b>


Watch homework
Play games
Listen to television
Do music


<i><b>5. Listen and repeat. Then practice with a</b></i>
<i><b>partner:</b></i>



<b> Vocabulary : </b>


<b>-</b> volleyball ( n ) (pict.) : bóng chuyền
<b>-</b> soccer ( n )(pict.) : bóng đá
<b>-</b> girl ( n ) (pict.) : con gái
<b>-</b> sport ( n ) (example) : thể thao
* Check Vo: Rub out and remember
<b> Present the dialogue</b>


<b>* Grid with answer key</b>


Name Volleyball Soccer


Nga V


Lan V


Thu V


Vui V


Girls (V) V
<b> Model sentences</b>


<b>a) </b>Do you/they play volleyball?
Does he/ she


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

- Give some examples



<b>C. Practice : </b>


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask
and answer the questions


Ss : do as directed
- Give correct answers.





<b>D. Consolidation </b>


- Remind Ss the Yes/No -questions
Ss : listen and copy


he/ she does
No, I/ we/ they don’t
he/ she doesn’t.


* Affirmative : <b>S + V(s/ es ) + O</b>


Negative : <b>S + don’t / doesn’t + V + O</b>


Interrogative: <b>Do/ Does + S + V + O ?</b>
<b> - Yes, S + do/ does</b>
<b> - No, S + don’t / doesn’t</b>


<i><b>6. Listen and answer :</b></i>



<i><b>* Yes/No Question Answer Drill . </b></i>
Example exchange:


a) S1: Do you (play soccer)?
S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.
a) Yes, I do.


b) Yes, I do.


c) Yes, I do. / No , I don’t.
d) Yes, I do. / No , I don’t.
e) Yes, I do.


f) Yes, I do.
g) Yes, I do.
<i><b>7. Remember :</b></i>
Page 55


* HOMEWORK : <i><b> - Learn by heart the form of Simple present</b></i>


<i><b> - Prepare Unit 5 : </b></i><b>B1, B3a,B4</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 15/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 10</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 29</i>


UNIT 5<b>: THINGS I DO</b>



<i><b>Lesson 4 : Section B – MY ROUTINE(</b></i><b>1,3a,4)</b>


<b>I / Objectives</b> :


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a picture story about
Ba’s daily routine to practice Simple present tense


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : I go to school at (a) quarter to seven.
What time does Ba get up ?


He gets up at six.


<sub></sub> Vocabulary : take a shower, eat, have lunch, go to bed, go home


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,Pelmanism


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Use methods “pelmanism”
Ss : do as teacher’s directed



<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down , repeat,
then read individual


- Play the tape again


Ss: Repeat , then read individual
Ss : do as directed


- Corect the mistakes


- set the scene , then guide Ss to
give the model sentences


<b>C. Practice :</b>


- Ask Ss to read the text again and
then let Ss play the game: Lucky
number.


<i><b> * Pelmanism </b></i>



<b>1</b> <b>2</b> <b>3</b> <b>4</b>


Go to get school up


<b>5</b> <b>6</b> <b>7</b> <b>8</b>


Do homework watch TV
<i><b>1. Read :</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


<b>-</b> take a shower (pict.) : tắm
<b>-</b> eat ( v ) (pict.) : ăn
<b>-</b> have lunch (pict.) : ăn trưa
<b>-</b> go to bed (pict.) : đi ngủ
<b>-</b> go home (trans.): về nhà
<b>-</b> from … to (trans.):từ ….đến


<b>Check Vo. : What & Where</b>


<b> Model sentence:</b>


I go to school at (a) quarter to seven


<b>* Nói ai đó làm việc gì vào thời gian nào :</b>
<b>S + V + at + time</b>


Ex: He eats breakfast <b>at half past six</b>.



* Lucky number


<b>1</b> <b>2*</b> <b>3</b> <b>4</b> <b>5*</b>


<b>6</b> <b>7*</b> <b>8</b> <b>9</b> <b>10</b>


<b>Questions :</b>


1. What time does Ba get up?
- He gets up at six.


3. What time does he go to school?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>




<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss the way to talk about
time and the present simple tense
Ss : listen and copy


4. What time does he go to bed?
<b>-</b> He goes to bed at ten o’clock
6. What does he do in the afternoon?


- In the afternoon, he plays games.
8. What time does he go home?


<b>-</b> He goes home at five o’clock.



9. Does he watch television in the evening?
<b>-</b> Yes, he does.


10. Does he read in the evening?
- No. he doesn’t.


<i><b>4. Remember :</b></i>
Page 57


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> - Learn by heart the form of Simple present</b></i>


<i><b> - Prepare Unit 5 :</b></i><b>B2, B3, B4</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 15/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 10</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 30</i>


UNIT 5<b>: THINGS I DO</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5 : Section B – MY ROUTINE(</b></i><b>2,3,4)</b>


<b>I / Objectives</b> :


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a picture story about
Ba’s daily routine to practice Simple present tense


<b>II/ Language contents :</b>



<sub></sub> Grammar : I go to school at (a) quarter to seven.
What time does Ba get up ?


He gets up at six.


What time do you get up?
I get up at ……….


<sub></sub> Vocabulary : start , finish


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,Word square


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Hang flipchart on the board
- Ask Ss to find the words in the
table


Ss : do as teacher’s directed


<b> </b>



<b> B. Presentation</b> :


- Hang flip chart on the board.
- Ask Ss to read the text again to
complete the table with the
information in the text.
Ss : listen and complete


<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Ask Ss to use the table to answer
the questions


Ss: work in pair to ask and answer
- Call on some pairs to ask and
answer in front of the class.


<i><b>*Word square : </b></i>
Key: watch,
shower,


game, homework, lunch
class


<i><b>2. Complete the table :</b></i>


<b>ACTION</b>


<b>TIME</b>



<b>Ba</b> <b>Me</b>


Get up <b>6.00</b> <b>6.00</b>


Go to school <b>6.45</b> <b>6.30</b>


Classes start <b>7.00</b> <b>6.45</b>


Classes finish <b>11.15</b> <b>11.15</b>


Have lunch <b>11.30</b> <b>11.45</b>


Go home <b>5.00</b> <b>11.30</b>


Go to bed <b>10.00</b> <b>10.00</b>


<i><b>3. Practice :</b></i>
<i><b>* Key</b></i>


a. Ba gets up at six.


Ba goes to school at a quarter to
seven.


He has class from seven to a quarter
past eleven.


He has lunch at half past eleven.
He goes home at five o’clock.


He goes to bed at ten o’clock.
b. I get up at six.


I go to school at half past six.
……….


I go home at half past eleven.
<i><b>4. Remember :</b></i>


<i><b>W</b></i> A H <i><b>L</b></i> L <i><b>H</b></i> P


H <i><b>A</b></i> Z <i><b>U</b></i> Z <i><b>O</b></i> N


M O <i><b>T</b></i> <i><b>N</b></i> P <i><b>M</b></i> Q


<i><b>G</b></i> R T <i><b>C</b></i> Y <i><b>E</b></i> D


<i><b>A</b></i> F J <i><b> H</b></i> <i><b>H</b></i> <i><b>W</b></i> X


<i><b>M</b></i> B L O <i><b>S</b></i> <i><b>O</b></i> G


<i><b>E</b></i> S L <i><b>S</b></i> J <i><b>R</b></i> G


P H <i><b>A</b></i> G F <i><b>K</b></i> V


N <i><b>L</b></i> C Z X C V


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss the way to talk about


time and the The present simple
tense


Ss : listen and copy then learn by
heart at home.


Page 57


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> - Learn by heart the form of Simple present</b></i>


<i><b> - Prepare Unit 5 :</b></i><b>C1, C2, C3, C4</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 20/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 11</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 31</i>


UNIT 5<b>: THINGS I DO</b>
<i><b>Lesson 6: Section C – CLASSES</b></i>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to learn about school subject
vocabulary with “TO HAVE” to talk about the school and the weekly timetable.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar: What do we have to day?
We have English.



When do we have Math?
We have Math on Tuesday


 Vocabulary : Monday Thursday Sunday


<i><b> Tuesday</b></i> Friday English


Wednesday Saturday History


Math literature Geography


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,Word square


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Use the method “Matching”
Ss : do as teacher’s directed


<b>B. Presentation </b>


- Use pictures to introduce the
subject.



- Have Ss listen to the tape and
repeat chorally, individual


- Explain some new words by using
real objects, translation


Ss : listen and copy down
listen and repeat


- Explains the questions about
timetable.


Ss : listen and copy down


- Let Ss say all the days in week by
Vietnamese then teacher give
English meaning.


Ss : say; copy and repeat


<b>C. Practice : </b>


- Introduce the situation of the
dialogue and give the request
Ss: listen


- Play the tape


* Matching<i><b> </b><b> </b></i>



Get up ăn trưa
Go home đi ngủ


Go to bed thức dậy
Have lunch đi tắm
Take a shower đi về nhà
<i><b>1. Listen and repeat :</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary :</b>


- timetable ( n ) : thời khoá biểu
- today ( n ) : hôm nay
- English ( n ) : môn Anh văn
- Literature ( n ) : mơn Tốn
- history ( n ) : môn Lịch sử
- Geography ( n ) : môn Địa lý


<b>Check Vo: What and Where</b>


<b> Question :</b>


<b>What do we have today?</b>
<b>We have + subjects</b>


Ex : What do we have today ?
We have English.


<i><b>2. Listen and repeat :</b></i>



- Monday ( n ) : thứ hai
- Tuesday ( n ) : thứ ba
- Wednesday ( n ) :thứ tư
- Thursday ( n ) :thứ năm
- Friday ( n ) :thứ sáu
- Saturday ( n ) :thứ bảy
- Sunday ( n ) : chủ nhật
<i><b>Check : Slap the board</b></i>


<i><b>3.Practice :</b></i>


<b>When do we have + subject ?</b>
<b>We have it on + days .</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

Ss : listen and complete the
dialogue




<b> D. Consolidation</b> :


- Have Ss read the dialogue
( chorus – pairs )


Sts : do as directed
.


We have it on Tuesday and Friday.
Hoa : When do we have ………1……… ?



Lan : We have it on ……2……..and ………3…… .
Hoa : When do we have ……4……… ?
Lan : We have it on ………5………. .


Hoa : Does Nam have English on Monday ?
Lan : No, he ………6…… .


1- History 2- Tuesday
3. Thursday 4- math


5- Monday, Wednesday and Friday
6- doesn’t


<i><b>* HOMEWORK :</b><b> - Learn by heart all the new words by heart</b></i>


- Learn this lesson again
- Prepare : Grammar practice


<i>Date of preparation: 20/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 11</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 32</i>


<b>GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>
<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, teacher help students to consolidate the knowledge from
Unit 4 and 5.



<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : The simple present tense.
Telling the time
Adjective with to be
Questions words
 Vocabulary : store, help


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,Word square


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<i><b>Date of preparation</b></i> : 14 – 11– 2006


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Ask Ss to write all the days of the
week


Ss : write


* Network


Monday Tuesday Wednesday


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<i><b></b></i>



<b>B. Presentation </b>


- Revise the present simple tense
and guide Ss to do exercises
Ss : do exercises


<b> </b>


<b> C. Practice</b> :


- Remind the structure and ask Ss to
look at the clock and answer in
pairs


Ss : practice in pairs


- Remind the way to use adjectives
- Ask


Ss : answer


- Remind and get Ss to complete
Ss : listen and complete


- Do the same methods above.
- Do the same methods above





Sunday


Thursday Friday Saturday


<b>1. Present simple tense :</b>


 Khẳng định : S + V-s/es + O


 Phủ định : S + don’t / doesn’t + V + O
 Nghi vaán : Do/ Does + S + O ?


a. get / get /get / gets / get / get


b. do / have / have / does / have / has /
do / have / have.


c. Do / go / go / do / go / go/ does / go /
goes.


d. Do – wash / wash
Does - wash – washes


<b>2. Time :</b>


a. It’s seven o’clock.
b. It’s nine fifteen.
c. It’s half past four.
d. It’s twelve o’clock.


<b>3. Adjectives :</b>



<b>S + be + adj</b>


a. Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t
b. No, it isn’t./ Yes, it is.


<b>4. Questions words :</b>


a. Where d. How
b. How e. Which
c. What f. Which


<b>5. Classes:</b>


a. We/ I have it on . . .
b. We/ I have Math on . . ..


<b>6. Present simple tense :</b>


help ( v ) : giúp đỡ


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

D<b>. Consolidation </b>


T : remind the knowledge


b. I go to school at ……….


<b>7. Present simple tense :</b>



a. gets
b. takes
c. washes
d. has
e. goes


<i><b>* HOMEWORK : - </b><b> Write all the answer in their notebook.</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 6: <b>A1, A2</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 20/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 11</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 33</i>


UNIT 6<b>: PLACES</b>


<i><b>Lesson 1: Section A – OUR HOUSE(</b></i><b>A1, A2)</b>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe what is near their
house. Read the description and listen to other descriptions.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : There are / There is………..


 Vocabulary : lake river park rice paddy tree



<i><b> yard</b></i> near beautiful flower


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,Word square


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> :


- Use the methods slap the board
Ss : do as directed


B<b>. Presentation :</b>


<i><b>* Slap the board</b></i>


House tree classroom
School chair history
Math English literature


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<i><b></b></i>
--- Use the picture to introduce the


context
Ss : listen



- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words by using
pictures, translation


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat




-- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask
and answer the question


Ss : do as directed


- Give the correct answers.


- Remind the questions with What
Ss : listen


T: show the picture and make


questions


Ss answer


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs


<i><b>1. Listen and repeat. Then ask and answer</b></i>
<i><b>the question</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


<b>-</b> lake ( n ) : hồ
<b>-</b> near ( prep ) : gần
<b>-</b> yard ( n ) : sân
<b>-</b> beautiful ( a ) : xinh đẹp
<b>-</b> here # there : ở đây # ở kia
<b>-</b> hotel ( n ) : khách sạn
<b>-</b> park ( n ) :công viên
<b>-</b> tree ( n ) : cây
<b>-</b> flower ( n ) : bông hoa
<b>-</b> rice paddy ( n ): cánh đồng lúa


<b>* Check Vo : Rub out and Remember</b>
<b>* Model sentences:</b>


There is ……….
There are ……….


<b>* Questions :</b>



a. She is twelve.
b. She is a student.
c. His name is Minh.
d. He’s twenty.


e. She lives in a house ( near a lake )
f. There is a lake near the house.


<b>2. Practice with a partner :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

<b>D. Consolidation</b> :
- Remind Ss the structures
Ss : listen and copy


S1 : What is that ?
S2 : It is a lake.


 Our house has a yard.
 We live in a house


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Write 5 sentences to describe the house</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 6: <b>A3, A4, A5, A6, A7</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 28/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 12</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 34</i>



UNIT 6<b>: PLACES</b>


<i><b>Lesson 2: Section A – OUR HOUSE (</b></i><b>A3, A4, A5, A6, A7)</b>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe simply what is near their
house, to understand town and country vocabulary for describing places where we
live


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : Review the structures they have learned
 Vocabulary : village , town, a city , in the country


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,jumble words


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> : ’
- Play “ Jumble words”
Ss: do as teacher’s directed
<b>B. Presentation</b> :
- Remind the structure


* Jumble words



Aydr = yard krap = park
Ekla = lake rveri= river


Telho = hotel rciepydad = rice paddy
There is ……… near………….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

<i><b></b></i>
---Ss: listen and copy down


- Give other examples


<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Ask Ss to work in groups to
complete the sentences


Ss : do as directed


- Give the correct answers.


- Guide Ss the way to do this
exercise.


- Explain some new words and read.
Ss: listen and repeat


- Play the tape


Ss: listen and write the words they


hear in their exercise books.


- Correct the answer


- Get Ss to describe where they live
Ss : describe


- Correct the mistakes


- Turn on the tape
Ss: Listen and repeat


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :
T: remind structure
Sts : listen and copy


There are …………...near …………


Ex: There is a lake near my house.
<i><b>3. Write. Complete the sentences :</b></i>


a. Our house has a yard. It’s near a rice
paddy.


b. There is a hotel near the lake.
c. There is a river and a park.


d. There are trees and flowers in the park.
<i><b>4. Listen : Write the words you hear in the </b></i>


exercise book :


<i><b>* New words</b></i><b> :</b>


<b>-</b> village ( n ) : ngôi làng
<b>-</b> town ( n ) : thị trấn
<b>-</b> a city (n) : thành phố


<b>-</b> in the country(n) : ở nông thôn
* Keys:


a. hotel
b. country
c. river
Tape transcript:


<i> 1. There’s a hotel near the park</i>
<i>2 They live in the country</i>


<i>3. The rice paddy is on the Mekong river.</i>


<i><b>5. Which of these are near your house?</b></i>
<i><b>Write sentences about your place:</b></i>


a. There is a hotel near our house.
b. There is a river near our house.
c. There are trees near our house.
d. There is a lake near our house.
e. There is a school near our house.
f. There is rice paddy near our house.


<i><b>6. Play with words : . </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<i><b>7. Remember :</b></i>
S + have / has + N


Ex : We live in a house.
I have a brother.
Our house has a yard.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Write 5 sentences to describe the house</b></i>


- Learn by heart the form of Simple present
- Prepare Unit 6: <b>A3, A4, A5, A6, A7</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 28/10/2010</i> <i> Week : 12</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 35</i>


UNIT 6<b>: PLACES</b>


<i><b>Lesson 3: Section B – IN THE CITY (B1, B5)</b></i>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe the busy area of the city
with commerce, and entertainment.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>



<sub></sub> Grammar : Where does he work ?
He works in a factory.
Where does he live ?
He lives in the city


 Vocabulary : store bookstore neighborhood


restaurant temple hospital


museum factory next


stadium work


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,jumble words


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Play “ words square”
Ss: do as teacher’s directed


* Word square


<b>H O</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b> <b>L</b> B V W <b>Z</b>



<b>O</b> C Z L <b>R</b> A <b>S</b> K <b>O</b>


<b>U</b> T I <b>E </b> N <b>S</b> K I <b>O</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words by using
pictures, translation


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


T play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


<b>C. Practice</b> :



- Play the tape and get Ss to listen the
sentences and choose they are True
or False


Ss : listen and choose


- Ask Ss to correct the False
sentences


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Introduces the questions to ask
where they work and live


Ss : listen and copy


- Ask some questions and get Ss to
work in pairs to answer


<b>S</b> A <b>V</b> T <b>A</b> C P E M


<b>E</b> <b>I</b> M <b>L</b> <b>A</b> <b>K E</b> A C


<b>R</b> S <b>C</b> P A Q K L F


<i><b>Key</b></i>


<i><b> </b><b> : hotel house class zoo lake river</b></i>


<i><b>1. Listen and read. Then answer the</b></i>


<i><b>questions:</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- store ( n ) : cửa hàng
- with( prep) : với, cùng


- next to ( prep ) : kế bên, bên cạnh
- restaurant ( n ) : nhaø haøng


- bookstore ( n ) : cửa hàng sách
- temple ( n ) : chùa, đình, miếu


-neighborhood ( n ): hàng xóm, khu lân cận
- hospital ( n ) : beänh vieän


- factory ( n ) : nhà máy
- museum ( n ) : viện bảo tàng
- stadium ( n ) : sân vận động
- work ( n ) : làm việc


<b>* Check : Matching</b>
<b>* Answer True or False :</b>


a. F ( Minh lives in the city )
b. T


c. F ( Their house is next to a store )
d. T



e. F ( Minh’s mother works in a hospital)
f. F ( Minh’s father works in a factory )
<i><b>5. Remember:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

1. Where does Minh live ?
- Minh lives in the city.


2. Where does his mother work ?
- She works in a hospital.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK : - </b><b> Learn by heart the form of Simple present and new words </b></i>


<i><b> - Prepare: Unit 6 (</b></i><b>B2, B3, B4, B5)</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 28/10/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 12</i>


<i>Date of teaching : ... </i> <i> </i>


<i>Period : 36</i>


UNIT 6<b>: PLACES</b>


<i><b>Lesson 4: Section B – IN THE CITY (B2 - B5)</b></i>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe the busy area of the city
with commerce, and entertainment.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>



<sub></sub> Grammar : Where does he work ?
He works in a factory.
Where does he live ?
He lives in the city


 Vocabulary : store bookstore neighborhood


restaurant temple hospital


museum factory next


stadium work


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,jumble words


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Play “ slap the board”
Ss : do as teacher’s directed


<i><b>* Slap the board</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

<i><b></b></i>
<b>B. Presentation</b> :



- Explain the request and get Ss to
read the passage again


Ss: do as the teacher says


<b>C. Practice : </b>


- Get Ss to complete the sentences in
group and cross check


Ss : do as directed


- Guide Ss the way to do this
exercise.


- Plays the tape


Ss : listen and write the words they
hear in the exercise book.


- Correct the answer
- Pay the tape


Ss : listen and repeat
D. Consolidation :


- Introduce the questions to ask
where they work and live



Ss : listen and copy


restaurant temple


stadium museum factory


* Reading the text


<b>( page 65)</b>


2. Read exercise B1 again. then complete the
<i><b>sentences:</b></i>


a. Minh and his family live in the city.
b. On the street, there is restaurant, a


bookstore and a temple.


c. His mother works in a hospital.
d. Minh’s house is next to a store.
e. His father works in a factory
<i><b>3. Listen :</b></i>


a. museum
b. bookstore
c. river
d. street
Tape transcript:



<i>a) There are three museums in the city.</i>
<i>b) The bookstore is on the otherside of the </i>
<i>street.</i>


<i>c) She walks along the river every morning.</i>
<i>d) Children can’t play soccer on the street.</i>


<i><b>4. Play with words:</b></i>


<b>(page 67)</b>


<i><b>5. Remember</b></i>


Where does he work ?
He works in a factory .
Where does he live?
He lives ……….
* Questions :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

2. Where does your mother work ?
- She works on a farm


<i><b>* HOMEWORK : - </b><b> Learn by heart the form of simple present and new words </b></i>


- Prepare : Unit 6 : <b>C1, C2 , C6</b>


<i>Date of preparation: 07/11/2010</i> <i> Week : 13</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>



<i> Period : 37</i>


UNIT 6<b>: PLACES</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5: Section C – AROUND THE HOUSE (</b></i><b>C1, C2 , C6)</b>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe the surround of their
houses as well as understand all the descriptions about the places and the location


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : Where is…………..? / Where are ……….?


The position of the prepositions in the sentences
 Vocabulary : well behind mountain to the left of


to the left of In front of


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,jumble words


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


T: play “ Matching ”



Ss : do as teacher’s directed




* Matching


Tree saân
Flower caây


Yard sân vận động
Stadium bệnh viện


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

<i><b></b></i>
<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss listen one
time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words
Ss :- listen and copy down
- repeat



- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Remind Ss the question with


<b>Where</b>


Ss : listen and copy down


<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and
answer the questions.


Ss work in pairs


T : correct and give the correct
answers


- Introduce the request of the
exercise


- Play the tape


Ss: listen and find the right picture
they hear in the exercise book.
T : correct the answer



<b>D. Consolidation : </b>


- Remind Ss some prepositions and


Hospital hoa
1. Listen and read. Then ask and answer the
<i><b>questions: </b></i>


<i> Vocabulary : </i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>in front of ( prep ) : phía trước</b></i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>behind ( prep ) : phía sau</b></i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>to the left of ( prep): phía bên trái</b></i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>to the right of(prep): phái bên phải</b></i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>well ( n ) : cái giếng</b></i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>mountain ( n ) : ngoïn nuùi</b></i>


<i><b>* Check Vo: Slap the board</b></i>


<i> Structure : </i>


<i>Where is ……….? Where are ……….?</i>


<i><b>Ex: Where is the book ?</b></i>
<i><b> It’s behind the pen .</b></i>


<i><b> Where are the tall trees ?</b></i>


<i><b> They are to the left of the house.</b></i>


<b>a.</b> It’s in front of the house.


<b>b.</b> They are behind the house.


<b>c.</b> They are behind the tall trees.


<b>d.</b> It’s to the left of the house.


<b>e.</b> They are to the right of the house.


<b>f.</b> It’s between the well and the flowers.
<i><b>2. Listen and find the right picture. Then</b></i>
<i><b>write about the three houses in exercise book :</b></i>
a. Ba lives in a beautiful house. There are a
lot of flowers in front of the house. ( A )


b. There are tall trees to the right of Lan’
house. (B)


c. Tuan’s house is very beautiful. There is a
well to the left of the house and there are
some flowers to the right. ( B )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

the questions with Where


Ss : listen and copy <b>Page 71</b>



<i><b>* HOMEWORK : - </b><b> Learn by heart the form of Simple present and new words</b></i>


<i><b> - Prepare : Unit 6: C3, C4 , C5, C6</b></i>


<i>Date of preparation: 07/11/2010</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 13</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 38</i>


UNIT 6<b>: PLACES</b>


<i><b>Lesson 6: Section C – AROUND THE HOUSE (C3, C4, C5, C6</b></i><b>)</b>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe the surround of their
houses as well as understand all the descriptions about the places and the location


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : Which is…………..?


The position of the prepositions in the sentences
 Vocabulary : between opposite photocopy bakery


drugstore police station movie theater toystore


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,jumble words



<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Play “ networks”


Ss: do as teacher’s directed


<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss listen
one time


* Network


To the right of in front of


<i><b> Behind To the left of</b></i>
<i><b>3. Listen and read. </b></i>



<i> Vocabulary : </i>


<b>-</b> <i><b>Photocopy ( n ) : cửa hàng phô tô</b></i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>Bakery ( n ) : cửa hàng bánh kẹo</b></i>


<b>-</b> <i><b>Drugstore ( n ) : hiệu thuốc tây</b></i>


<b>-</b> <i><b>Police station ( n ) : đồn công an</b></i>


LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<i><b></b></i>
---Sts : listen


T explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Remind Ss the question with


<b>Where</b>


Ss : listen and copy down



<b>C. Practice : </b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask
and answer the questions.
Ss:work in pairs


- Correct and give the correct
answers


- Introduce the request of the
exercise


- Play the tape


Ss : listen and find the right
picture they hear in the exercise
book.


- Correct the answer


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss some prepositions
and the questions with Where
Ss : listen and copy


<b>-</b> <i><b>Movie theater ( n ) : raïp chieáu phim</b></i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>Toystore ( n ) : của hàng đồ chơi</b></i>



<b>-</b> <i><b>Between ( prep ) : ở giữa</b></i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>Opposite ( prep ) : đối diện</b></i>


<i><b>* Check Vo: Rub out and remember</b></i>


<i> Structure : </i>


<i>Where is the ………?</i>


<i>It is opposite the ………</i>
<i>It is between the ………and the………</i>


<i><b>Ex : Where is the movie theater ?</b></i>
<i><b> It is opposite the police station.</b></i>


<i><b> It is between the drugstore and the bakery.</b></i>
<i><b>4. Practice with a partner :</b></i>


<b>a. Ask and answer questions about the </b>
<b>picture in exercise :</b>


S1 : Where is the bakery ?
S2 : It is opposite the toystore.
S1 : Where is the drugstore ?
S2 : It is next to the movie theater.


<b>b. Play a guessing game :</b>



Modal :


1. S1 : It’s opposite the bakery. What is it ?
S2 : It’s the toystore.


S1 : Yes, that’s right.
2. It’s the movie theater.
3. It’s the photocopy store.
4. It’s the photocopy store.
5. It’s the drugstore.


<i><b>6.Remember:</b></i>


<b>page 71</b>


<i><b>* Questions</b></i><b> :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

T: can ask some questions about
their houses.


Ss : listen and answer


4. What is to the right of your house ?


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn by heart the form of the questions and new words</b></i>


- Prepare to do a test ( 45 minutes)


<i>Date of preparation: 07/11/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 13</i>



<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 39</i>


<b>TEST ONE PERIOD</b>


I<b>/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, teacher will be able to check students’ knowledge form
Unit 4 to Unit 6


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : The simple present tense
Time


Question words
<sub></sub> Vocabulary :


<b>III. Techniques :</b>


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : Test


<b>V/ Procedures</b><i><b> :</b></i>


<i><b>I/ Chọn câu trả lời đúng : ( 2ms )</b></i>


1. After school, Nam ... .


a. listen to music b. listens to music c. Listen to the music


2. We have history ...Tuesday and Thursday.


a. at b. in c. on
3. The well is ...the house.


a. to the right of b. in the right of


c. at the right of
4. A doctor works in a ... .


a. museum


b. hospital


c. factory


<i><b>II/ Cho thể đúng của động từ trong ngoặc và trả lời câu hỏi : ( 3ms )</b></i>


Everyday, Lan gets up at six. She brushes her teeth, washes her face and
(have)...(1)...breakfast at 6.30. After breakfast, she (get )……(2)


………….dressed and goes to school at 6.45. After school, she listens to music and does


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

<i><b></b></i>
---the housework. In ---the evening, does her homework and (watch ) ...


(3)...television. She goes to bed at 10 o’clock.
 <b>Questions :</b>


1. What time does Lan get up ? ...


2.What does she do after


school ?...
3. Does dhe go to bed at 10


o’clock ? ...


<i><b>III/ Hãy ghép các cụm từ và chữ số tương ứng ở cột A và B : ( 2ms )</b></i>


<b>A</b>
<b> B</b>


Twelve fifteen


5.30
Eight twenty five


6.45
Five thirty


12.15
Six forty five


8.25
<i><b>IV/ Điền các từ để hỏi :Where / when / what / how vào chỗ trống : (2ms)</b></i>
1 ... does your father work ? – He works in a factory.
2 ... many floors does your school have ? – It has 2 floors.
3 ... do you have Math ? – We have it on Tuesday and Friday.
4 ... time do the students go to school ? – At twelve thirty.
<i><b>V/ Nghe và đánh dấu từ đã nghe được : ( 1m )</b></i>



1. Hospital factory


museum
stadium


2. street tree


river
lake


<b>KEY</b>


I/ Mỗi câu đúng được 0,5 điểm


1 – b listens to music 2 – c – On 3 –


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

II/ Mỗi câu đúng được 0,5 điểm


1. has 2. gets 3.


watches


Questions : 1. Lan gets up at six.


2. After school, she listen to music and does
the housework.


3. Yes, she does.
III/ )



<b>A</b>


<b> B</b>


Twelve fifteen


5.30
Eight twenty five


6.45
Five thirty



12.15


Six forty five


8.25
IV/ Mỗi câu đúng được 0,5 điểm


1. Where 2. How 3. When 4. What
V/ Mỗi câu đúng được 0,5 điểm


1. factory 2. street


<i>Date of preparation:12/11/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 14</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>



<i> Period : 40</i>


<b>UNIT 7 : YOUR HOUSE</b>


<i><b>Lesson 1: Section A – AROUND THE HOUSE (A1,2,7</b></i><b>)</b>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen to a dialogue and read a
letter about a house to understand the details


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : Is there……….? – Yes, there is / No, there isn’t.


Are there …….? – Yes, there are / No, there aren’t.


 Vocabulary : old any new garden vegetable
photo


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,network


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Play “ networks”


Ss do as teacher’s directed




<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Use the picture to introduce the
context
Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss listen
one time and guess information
about the house


Ss : listen and guess


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus )


- Have Ss play the roles of Hoa and
Minh



Ss : do as directed


* Network


Yard tree flower




Well lake park
<i><b>1. Listen. Then practice with a partner :</b></i>


<i>Questions</i> <i>Yes</i> <i>No</i>


<i><b>………big ?</b></i> 


<i><b>………small?</b></i> 


<i><b>………old</b></i> 


<i><b>………a yard?</b></i> 


<i><b>………a well ?</b></i> 


<i><b>………..flowers ?</b></i> 


<i><b>………trees ?</b></i> 


 Vocabulary :


<i><b>- old ( a ) (realia) : cũ</b></i>


<i><b>- new ( a ) (realia) : mới</b></i>
<i><b>- any (trans.) : nào</b></i>
<i><b>- garden (picture) : vườn </b></i>
<i><b>- vegetable (picture) : rau</b></i>
<i><b>- photo (picture) : bức ảnh </b></i>
<i><b>* Check: Slap the board</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

- Remind Ss the Yes – No
question


Ss : listen and copy down
<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and
answer the questions.


Ss work in pairs


- Correct the mistakes.


- Ask Ss to look at the picture and
describe the house in the picture.


- Have them read the letter
silently.


- Hang the poster on the board and
ask Ss to match.


- Correct the mistakes.



- Call some pairs to practice asking
and answering in front of the class.


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss some prepositions and
the yes – no questions




 Structure<i> :</i>


<i>Is there ……… ? – Yes, there is .</i>
<i> - No, there isn’t.</i>


<i><b>* Now work with a partner. Ask questions</b></i>
<i><b>about their house.</b></i>


<i><b>Ex : Is your house big ? </b></i>
Yes, it is.


<i><b>2. Listen and read. Then match the questions</b></i>
<i><b>and answers</b></i>


<i><b>Keys: a - D</b></i>
b - A
c – E
d – B
e - C



<i><b>7.Remember:</b></i>


<i>Is there + a/ an + N ? – Yes, there is .</i>
<i> - No, there isn’t.</i>
<i>Are there any + N ? – Yes, there are .</i>


- No, there aren’t.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn by heart the form of the questions and new words</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 7 : A3,4,5,6,7


<i>Date of preparation:12/11/2010</i> <i> Week : 14</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 41</i>


<b>UNIT 7 : YOUR HOUSE</b>


<i><b>Lesson 2: Section A – AROUND THE HOUSE (A3,4,5,6,7</b></i><b>)</b>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to get some information about
other’s house and give their own information.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<i><b></b></i>
---Are there …….? – Yes, there are / No, there aren’t.


 Vocabulary : bank supper market postoffice


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,slap the board


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i> :


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> :
-Play “ Slap the board”
Ss do as teacher’s directed


<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Remind Ss the Yes – No
questions


Ss : listen and copy down


- Give meaning of the some new


words by using pictures


<b> </b>


<b> C. Practice :</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask
and answer the questions.


Ss work in pairs


- Correct and give the correct
answers


* Slap the board


 Structure :


<i>Is there ……… ? – Yes, there is .</i>
<i> - No, there isn’t.</i>
<i>Are there any + N ? – Yes, there are .</i>
<i> - No, there aren’t.</i>


bank ( n )


post office ( n )


supermarket ( n )
3. Practice with a partner :



a.What is that ? – It ‘s a hotel
- It’s a bank


- It ‘ s a supermarket.
What are those ? – They are stores


- They are flowers


What are those ? – They are flowers


house yard trees


big small


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

- Give some questions
- Ss: Answer in realia


- Have them to practice in pairs
- Ask Ss to choose one of the
houses.and don’t tell their partner
which house.


- Ask Ss to use the sentences in
example to do this exercise.


- Hang 3 pictures (A4 / p.74) on
the board and let Ss to guess then
play the tape


Ss : listen and choose the correct


picture.


- Ss: look at the text, and listen to
the tape .


- Ss: listen again and repeat


- Call some good Ss to read aloud
in front of the class


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss some prepositions
and the yes – no questions


What is that ? – It is a hospital.
b. Is there a lake near your house ?


<b>-</b> Yes, there is.


Are there any trees near your house ?
<b>-</b> No, there aren’t.


4. Work in pairs. Look at the pictures….


<i><b>5. Listen to this description. Which house is it?</b></i>


<i>There are some mountains behind the house. </i>
<i>There are some trees to the right.There is a lake </i>
<i>to the left</i>.



Answer : Picture A
<i><b>6. Play with words</b></i>
<i><b>7.Remember:</b></i>


<i>Is there + a/ an + N ? – Yes, there is .</i>
<i> - No, there isn’t.</i>


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn by heart the form of the questions and new words</b></i>


<i>Date of preparation:12/11/2010</i> <i> Week : 14</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 42</i>


<b>UNIT 7 : YOUR HOUSE</b>


<i><b>Lesson 3: Section B – </b></i><b>TOWN OR COUNTRY</b>? (B 1)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to learn how to describe the
service in the city or in the country where they live.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : Do you live in town ? – Yes, I do / No, I don’t


Does he live in the country ? – Yes, he does / No, he


doesn’t


 Vocabulary : apartment supermarket post office bank


clinic market zoo quiet / noisy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,lucky numbers


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i> <i><b>:</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Play the game : Lucky number
Ss do as teacher’s directed


<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss listen
one time and guess information


about the Ba’s house


Ss : listen and guess


- Explain some new words by
using pictures and antonyms


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


- Play the tape again and get Ss to


* Lucky number


<b>1</b> <b>2</b> <b>3</b> <b>4</b>


<b>5</b> <b>6</b> <b>7</b> <b>8</b>


a. What is in front of youre house?
b. Where are the mountains?
c. Where is the yard?


d. Are there any trees near your house?
<i><b> 1. Listen then practice with a partner : </b></i>


<i> Vocabulary : </i>


<i><b>- apartment ( n ) : căn hộ</b></i>
<i><b>- Zoo ( n ) : sở thú</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Remind Ss the Yes – No
questions


Ss : listen and copy down
<b>C. Practice : </b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask
and answer the questions.


Ss work in pairs


- Correct and give the correct
answers


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss some prepositions
and the yes – no questions




<i><b>- noisy ( a ) # quiet : ồn ào # yên tónh</b></i>


<i>Check : Rub out and remember</i>


<i> Structure :</i>


<b>Do you live in town ? – Yes, I do </b>


<b> - No, I don’t</b>


<b>Does he live in the country ? – Yes, he does </b>


<b>No, he doesn’t.</b>


a. Yes, he does.
b. No, he doesn’t.
c. Yes, it is.


d. No, she doesn’t.
e. No, there aren’t.
f. Yes, it is.


In town In country


-live in an apartment.
-It’s noisy.


-There are shops,
zoos, banks...


-live in a house.
- It’s quiet.


- There are trees,
paddy fields...


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn by heart the form of the questions and new words</b></i>



<i><b> - Prepare : Unit 7:</b></i><b>B2, B3, B4</b>


<i>Date of preparation:18/11/2010</i> <i> Week : 15</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 43</i>


<b>UNIT 7 : YOUR HOUSE</b>


<i><b>Lesson 4: Section B – </b></i><b>TOWN OR COUNTRY</b>? ( <b>B2, B3, B4</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to learn how to describe the
service in the city or in the country where they live.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : Do you live in town ? – Yes, I do / No, I don’t


Does he live in the country? – Yes, he does / No, he
doesn’t


 Vocabulary : apartment supermarket post office bank


clinic market zoo quiet / noisy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<i><b></b></i>



<b>---III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,jumble words


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<b>V/ Procedures</b><i><b> :</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Use the method “Jumble words”
Ss do as teacher’s directed


<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Get Ss to read the description
about Ba


Ss : read


- Correct the mistakes
<b>C. Practice : </b>


- Have Ss write about Chi’s house in
groups



Ss : Work in groups then cross check
- Give answer


- Guide Ss to listen comprehension
Ss : listen to the tape and check (<b> ) </b>


or cross<b> ( x ) </b>


- Correct the mistakes


<b> </b>


<i><b>* Jumble words</b></i>
Effcoi = office


Rasutpemrke = supermarket
Selwfor = flowers


Ccnlli = clinic


Sydfaidpedl = paddy fields


<i><b>2. Read about Ba. Then write sentences about</b></i>
<i><b>Chi </b></i>


Ba lives in an apartment in town.
Near his apartment, there is a market.
It’s very noisy.



Chi lives in a house in the country. Near her
house, there is a lake and there aren’t any
stores. It is very quiet.


3. Listen and check. Complete this table :


<b>N</b>


<b>am</b>


<b>e</b>


<b>C</b>


<b>it</b>


<b>y</b>


<b>T</b>


<b>ow</b>


<b>n</b>


<b>C</b>


<b>ou</b>


<b>nt</b>



<b>ry</b>


<b>A</b>


<b>pa</b>


<b>rt</b>


<b>H</b>


<b>ou</b>


<b>se</b>


<i><b>Minh</b></i>  <sub>x</sub> <sub>x</sub>  <sub>x</sub>


<i><b>Tuan</b></i> x  <sub>x</sub> <sub>x</sub> 


<i><b>Nga </b></i>  <sub>x</sub> <sub>x</sub> <sub>x</sub> 


a. Minh lives in an apartment in the city.
b. Tuan lives in a house in a town.


c. Nga lives in a house in the city.
<i><b>4. Remember :</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<b> D. Consolidation</b> :


T: remind sts questions with Do /


Does


Ss : listen and copy down


No, I live in the country.
Does he live in town ?
Yes, he does.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn by heart the form of the questions and new words</b></i>


<i><b> - Prepare : Unit 7:</b></i><b>C1, C2</b>


- Do exercises 3, 4, 5


<i>Date of preparation:18/11/2010</i> <i> Week : 15</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 44</i>


<b>UNIT 7 : YOUR HOUSE</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5: Section C – </b></i><b>ON THE MOVE</b> ( <b>C1, C2</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about means of transport
and their routine


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>



 Grammar : How do you go to school ?
I go to school by bike.


 Vocabulary : bike/ bicycle train motorbike plane


bus travel walk


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<b>V/ Procedures</b><i><b> :</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


-Get Ss to say some name of
transports


Ss do as teacher’s directed
<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen



- Show the transports in the pictures
and give the Vietnamese meaning


Ss : listen, copy and repeat ( chorus
– individual )


- Play the tape and have Ss repeat


<b>C. Practice : </b>


- Have Ss work in pairs to ask and
answer.


Ss : work in pairs


Ơtơ , xe đạp, xe máy, tàu hoả, máy bay, …


<i><b>1. Listen : How do you go to school?</b></i>
<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- bike = bicycle ( n ) : xe đạp


- motorbike ( n ) : xe gắn máy


- car ( n ) : xe hơi
- bus ( n ) : xe buýt
- walk ( v ) : đi bộ
- plane ( n ) : máy bay
- train ( n ) : tàu lửa


- on the move : đi lại


<b> Structure : </b>Hỏi về phương tiện đi lại:
<i><b>How + do / does + S + go / travel ?</b></i>


<i><b>S + go / travel + by + phương tiện</b></i>
Ex : How does Lien go to school ?
He goes to school by bike .
How does Huong go to school ?
She walks to school.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

<b>D. Consolidation : </b>


- Remind Ss questions with How
- show the picture and have Ss listen
to the tape and repeat.


- Call some paùi to read the question
and the answer in front ofø the class.
- Have Ss practice in pairs.


a. How does Mr. Ba travel to work ?
<b>-</b> He travels by motorbike


b. How does Miss Hoa travel to work ?
<b>-</b> She walks to school.


c. How does Mr. Kim travel to work ?
<b>-</b> He travels by train.



d. How does Mrs Dung travel to work ?
- She travels by car.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn by heart the form of the questions and new words</b></i>


<i><b> - Prepare : Unit 7:</b></i><b>C3, C4,C5, C6</b>


<i>Date of preparation:18/11/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 15</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 45</i>


<b>UNIT 7 : YOUR HOUSE</b>


<i><b>Lesson 6: Section C – </b></i><b>ON THE MOVE</b> ( <b>C3, C4, C6</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read about Hoang’s daily
routine for further practice in the simple present habitual actions


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : What time ………..?


 Vocabulary : Review all the words that they have learnt.


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---V/ Procedures</b><i><b> :</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> :


- Ask Ss some questions
Ss do as teacher’s directed


<b> B. Activity 1 : </b>


- Explain the request of the listening
exercises


Ss : listen and match the name and
the means of transport they used
- Play the tape


Ss : listen match


- Play the tape again and check


<b>C. Activity 2 </b>


<i><b> 1. Presentation</b><b> :</b><b> </b></i>


- Give point of time and Hoang’s


actions and get sts to guess what
Hoang do in what time


- Explain some new words by
explanation


Ss : listen – repeat – copy down
2. Practice :


- Play the tape and let sts to repeat
after it.


Ss: listen and repeat.


- Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering the questions about Hoang
Ss : work in pairs




- Have Ss look at the text and listen
to the tape.


<i><b>* Chatting</b></i>


How do you go to school ?
<b>-</b> I walk to school.


<b>-</b> I go to school by bike.



<i><b>3. Listen and write short answer : </b></i>
<i><b>Ba   By bus</b></i>
<i><b>Lan   by bike</b></i>
<i><b>Nam   By</b></i>
<i><b>motorbike</b></i>


<i><b>Nga   By car</b></i>
<i><b>Tuan   By bus</b></i>
<i><b>Mrs. Huong   By train</b></i>
<i><b>Mr. Ha   Walk to</b></i>
<i><b>school</b></i>


<i><b>Miss Chi   By car</b></i>
<i><b>4. Listen and read :</b></i>


<b>Actions Time</b>


Gets up 5:30
Leave the house 6:30
School start 7:00
Have lunch 12:00
School ends 11:30


<i>* New words :</i>


<i><b>- leave ( v ) : rời khỏi, rời đi</b></i>


<i>* Answer the questions :</i>


<i><b>a. He gets up at 5.30</b></i>



<i><b>b. He goes to school at 6.30.</b></i>
<i><b>c. No, he doesn’t.</b></i>


<i><b>d. Yes, he does.</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

- Ss: Listen and repeat


- Guide Ss to write the answers for 2
last questions and write the


completed text,


- Call some good Ss to read the text
in front of the class.


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss questions with How


<i><b>5. Play with words</b></i>


6. Remember :


<i><b>How do you go / travel ………….?</b></i>
<i><b>I go / travel by ……….</b></i>


<i><b>How does he go / travel ………….?</b></i>
<i><b>He goes / travels by ……….</b></i>



<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn by heart the form of the questions and new words</b></i>


<i><b> - Prepare : Unit 8:</b></i><b>A1, A2 , A3</b>


- Write a passage about your routine


<i>Date of preparation:27/11/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : </i>


<i>16</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 46</i>


<b>UNIT 8 : OUT AND ABOUT</b>


<i><b>Lesson 1: Section A – </b></i><b>WHAT ARE YOU DOING?</b>( <b>A1, A2 , A3, A7</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to express what is happening at
the


moment of speaking with a singular subject or a third person


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : The present progressive tense


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

<i><b></b></i>



--- Vocabulary : video games ride drive


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<b>V/ Procedures</b><i><b> :</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Ask some questions
Ss : answer




<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


T: play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen



- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat
- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Explain the Present Progressive
tense.


Ss : listen and copy down


- Play the tape and get Ss to repeat
Ss : listen and repeat




<b>C. Practice : </b>


- Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering the questions with Present
Progressive tense


Ss : work in pairs


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and


<i><b>* Chatting</b></i>



<b>Questions :</b>


1. What time do you get up ?
2. How do you go to school ?


3. Do you live in the country or city ?
<i><b>1.Listen and repeat :</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- video games ( n ) : trò chơi điện tử
- ride ( v ) : cưỡi xe đạp
- drive ( v ) : lái xe


<b> Structure : The present Progressive </b>


<b>tense</b>


Form : <b>S + be + V-ing</b>


Usage : Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn dùng để diễn
tả một hành động đang xảy ra trong lúc ta
đang nói


Ex : He is playing games.
Để hỏi ai đó đang làm gì :


<b>What + be + S + V-ing ?</b>


Ex: What is he doing ?


He is watching TV


<i><b>2. Ask and answer questions about all the</b></i>
<i><b>people in the pictures and about you:</b></i>


What is he doing ? – He is playing video
games.


What is she doing ? – She is riding her bike.
<i><b>3. Answer. Then write the answer :</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

work in pairs.
Ss : do as directed.


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss the present progressive
tense and ask questions


Ss : listen and answer
.


b. What is she doing ?
<b>-</b> She is riding her bike .
c. What is he doing ?
<b>-</b> He is driving his car.


d. What are they doing?


- They are waiting for the bus


<i><b>7. Remember</b></i>


<i><b>* HOMEWORK - </b><b> Learn all the new words & the The Present Progressive tense</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 8 : A4,5,6,7


<i>Date of preparation:27/11/2010</i> <i> Week : 16</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 47</i>


<b>UNIT 8 : OUT AND ABOUT</b>


<i><b>Lesson 1: Section A – </b></i><b>WHAT ARE YOU DOING?</b>( <b>A1, A2 , A3, A6</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to express what is happening at
the


moment of speaking with a singular subject or a third person


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : The present progressive tense
 Vocabulary : businessman


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; slap the board



<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<b>V/ Procedures</b><i><b> :</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Have Ss play game” Slap the
board” – Stick all the picture in A1
on the board


- Say English words
Ss : slap on the pictures.




<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


T: play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time



Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat
- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Explain the Present Progressive
tense.


Ss : listen and copy down


- Play the tape and get Ss to repeat
Ss : listen and repeat




- Have Ss look at the text and listen
to the tape.


- Ss: Listen and repeat


- Guide Ss to write the answers for 2


<i><b>* Slap the board</b></i>


……….



<i><b>4 .Listen and number the picture as you</b></i>
<i><b>hear.</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- businessman: nhà doanh nghiệp,thương
gia


<b> Structure :</b>


Để hỏi ai đó đang làm gì :


<b>What + be + S + V-ing ?</b>


Ex: What is he doing ?
He is watching TV


1-b: Mr. Tam is a businessman. He is driving
home from work.


2- f: Mrs. Thanh is waiting at the station.
The train is late and she is very angry.
3- d. Nam and Quang are going around the
city by motorbike.


4- a: Viet is a student. He is riding his bike
to school.


5- c: Mai lives near the school. She is


walking home from school.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

last questions and write the
completed text,


- Call some good Ss to read the text
in front of the class.


<b> </b>


<b> C. Practice : </b>


- Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering the questions with Present
Progressive tense


Ss : work in pairs- Ask Ss to look at
the pictures and work in pairs.


Ss : do as directed.


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss the present progressive
tense and ask questions


Ss : listen and answer


<i><b>5. Play with words</b></i>



<i><b>6. Read. Then ask and answer questions</b></i>
<i><b>with : Who , What , Where , When</b></i>


<i><b>a. Who is that ? – That is Mr. Ha.</b></i>


<i><b>- What does he do ? – He is a businessman.</b></i>
<i><b>- Where is he going ? – He is going to Ha</b></i>
<i><b>Noi.</b></i>


<i><b>- How is he traveling ? – He is traveling by</b></i>
<i><b>plane.</b></i>


<i><b>b. Who is that ? – That is Miss Hoa.</b></i>
<i><b>- What does she do ? – She is a teacher.</b></i>
<i><b>-Where is she going ? – She is going to</b></i>
<i><b>school.</b></i>


- How is she going ? – She is walking to
<i><b>school.</b></i>


<i><b>7. Remember</b></i>


<i><b>* HOMEWORK - </b><b> Learn all the new words & the The Present Progressive tense</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 8 : B1


<i>Date of preparation:27/11/2010</i> <i> Week : 16</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>



<i> Period : 48</i>


<b>UNIT 8 : OUT AND ABOUT</b>


<i><b>Lesson 3: Section B – </b></i><b>A TRUCK DRIVER</b> (B1)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about one’s daily life,
what are happening.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : The present progressive tense


 Vocabulary : load farm foodstall arrive farmer


unload eat driver


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,hangman


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i> <i><b>:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> :


- Play “ Hang man “
Ss : do as direct




<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Explain the Present Progressive
tense again.



Ss : listen and copy down


- Play the tape and get Ss to repeat
Ss : listen and repeat




<b>C. Practice :</b>


- Have Ss work in pairs asking and
answering the questions


Ss : work in pairs


<i><b>*Hang man </b></i>


1. businessman 1
2. driver 2
3. travel 3
4. wait


5 6
4
7 8
1.Listen and read. Then ask and answer the
<i><b>questions :</b></i>


 Vocabulary :


- truck ( n ) (pic.) : xe taûi


- truck driver ( n ) : tài xế xe tải


- load ( v ) (pic.) : chất hàng, xếp hàng
- unload ( v ) (pic.) : bốc dỡ hàng
- farmer ( n ) (example) : nông dân
- farm ( n ) : nông trại
- eat ( v ) (pict.) : ăn
- vegetables ( n ) (pict.) : rau quả
- foodstall ( n ) pict.) : quán ăn nhỏ
<i><b>* Check: Slap the board</b></i>


<i><b>* Structure</b></i>


<b>The present Progressive tense</b>


Form : <b>S + be + V-ing</b>


Usage : Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn dùng để diễn tả
một hành động đang xảy ra trong lúc ta đang
nói


Ex : He is playing games.


<i><b>* Answer the questions</b></i><b> :</b>


a. Mr. Quang is a truck driver.


b. He is going to a farm at five o’clock.
c. A farmer is waiting for him.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>



<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Give some statements and let Ss to
choose True or False


Ss : do


e. He is eating breakfast.
f. He is eating at a foodstall.


<i><b>* True or False statements</b></i><b> :</b>


1. Mr. Quang is a teacher.
2. He is going to the farm.


3. He is taking vegetables to the post office.
4. He is eating breakfast at seven o’clock.
5. He is eating at a restaurant.


<b>Key :</b>


1. False . He is a truck driver.
2. True


3. False . He is taking vegetables to the
market.


4. True



5. False. He is eating at a foodstall.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> - Learn the new words & write all the answer in the notebooks</b></i>


<i><b> - Prepare : Unit 8: B2,4</b></i>


<i>Date of preparation:04/12/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 17</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 49</i>


<b>UNIT 8 : OUT AND ABOUT</b>


<i><b>Lesson 4: Section B – </b></i><b>A TRUCK DRIVER</b> (<b>B2, B3,B4</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about one’s daily life,
what are happening.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : The present progressive tense
 Vocabulary : copy correct


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,matching


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board



<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i> <i><b>:</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Play “ Matching “
Ss : do as direct


* Matching


1. truck a. xếp, chất hàng
2. truck driver b. xe taûi


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss listen
one time


Ss : listen



- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat
- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Remind Ss Yes – No questions
Ss : listen and copy down


- Play the tape and get Ss to
repeat


Ss : listen and repeat
<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Have Ss work in pairs asking
and answering the questions
Ss : work in pairs


- Play the tape
- Ss: listen & repeat


- Call some good Ss to read aloud
- Correct the mistakes


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss the questions that


they have learnt


3. load c. nông trại
4. unload d. tài xế xe tải
5. farm e. bốc, dỡ hàng
6. farmer f. đến


7. arrive g. noâng dân
8. vegetables h. cầm laáy
9. take i. rau quaû


<i><b>2.Listen and repeat. Then ask and answer the</b></i>
<i><b>questions :</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- copy ( v ) : cheùp sao


- correct ( v ) : sửa, điều chỉnh


<b>Hỏi có phải ai đang làm gì không </b>
<b> Be + S + V-ing…?</b>


<i><b> Yes, S + be / No, S be not</b></i>
Ex : He is doing his homework
Is he doing his homework?
Yes, he is.


<i><b>* Answer the questions</b></i><b> :</b>



a. Ba is doing his homework.
b. Yes, he is.


c. No, he isn’t.


d. He is playing soccer.
e. No, they aren’t.
<i><b>3. Play with words</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

Ss : copy Where is he going ?
He is going to a farm.
Who is waiting for him ?
A farmer is waiting for him.
Are you working ?


Yes, I am / No, I am not.
Is he / she working ?
Yes, she is / No, she isn’t.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> - Learn all the new words and write all the answer in the </b></i>


notebooks


- Prepare : Unit 8: <b>C1, C2</b>


<i>Date of preparation:04/12/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 17</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 50</i>



<b>UNIT 8 : OUT AND ABOUT</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5: Section C – ROAD SIGNS</b></i><b> (C1, C2</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know the road signs and talk
about these signs as well as get information from these on the road.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : Modal verb : CAN – CAN’T


 Vocabulary : can park road signs job one way


policeman sign turn left turn right go ahead


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,noughts and crosses


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i> <i><b>:</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Give some road signs and ask Ss
to give the meanings.



Ss : do as directed


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words (Using
pictures, road signs, . . .)


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Explain the use of modal verb
“CAN “



Ss : listen and copy down


- Play the tape and get Ss to
repeat


Ss : - listen and repeat
- Read individual
<b>C. Practice :</b>


- Have Ss work in groups to fill in
the blanks and read sentences
aloud


Ss : do


<i><b> A B C</b></i>
<i><b>Key: A : You can’t park here.</b></i>
<i><b> B : One way </b></i>
C : You can park here.
<i><b>1. Listen and read :</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- sign ( n ) : bảng hiệu, biển báo
- park ( v ) : đậu xe, đỗ xe


- difficult ( a ) : khó khăn
- job ( n ) : nghề nghiệp


- policeman ( n ) : coâng an


- One way : Đường một chiều
- turn left ( v ) : rẽ trái


- turn right ( v ) :rẽ phải
- go ahead ( v ) : ñi thaúng
- can ( v ) : có thể
* Check Vo: Slap the board


<b> Structure :</b>


Nói ai đó có thể làm gì :
<i><b>S + can + V-inf</b></i>


Ex : You can play soccer.
Nói ai không thể làm gì :
<i><b>S + can’t + V-inf</b></i>


Ex : You can’t play soccer.


<i><b>2. What do the road signs mean? Add can or</b></i>


<i><b>can’t</b>.</i>


a. You can turn left.
b. You can’t turn right.
c. You can go ahead.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<b>D. Consolidation</b> :



- Remind structure by asking Ss to
play game “Noughts and crosses”
Ss : Do as teacher says


* Noughts and crosses


(drive) a car (ride) a bike (walk)
(ride) a


motorbike (park) (wait for) a bus
( turn) left (go) straight (turn) right
Ex: S1: What is he doing?


S2: He’s driving a car


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn all the new words and write all the answer in the</b></i>


notebooks


- Prepare Unit 5: <b>C3, C4, C5, C6</b>


<i>Date of preparation:04/12/2010</i> <i> Week : 17</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 51</i>


<b>UNIT 8 : OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<i><b>Lesson 6: Section C – ROAD SIGNS</b></i><b> (C3, C4, C5, C6</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to say someone must do
something or mustn’t do something


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : Modal verb : MUST – MUSTN’T


 Vocabulary : slow down go fast warn help intersection
accident dangerous


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Play “ Matching “
Ss : do as direct


<i><b> you can’t park here</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

<i><b></b></i>



<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Remind Ss the usage of MUST
Ss : listen and copy down


- Play the tape and get Ss to
repeat


Ss : listen and repeat
<b>C. Practice</b> :



- Have Ss work in group to choose
the correct sign and number them
Ss : do as direcrted


- Play the tape


<i><b> one way</b></i>


you an park here


<i><b>3. Listen and repeat. Then ask and answer the</b></i>
<i><b>questions :</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- intersection ( n ) : ngã tư
- dangerous ( a ) : nguy hiểm
- accident ( n ) : tai nạn
- discipline ( n ) : kỷ luật
- help ( v ) : giúp đỡ
- warn ( v ) : cảnh báo
- slow down ( v ) : chậm lại
- go fast ( v ) : đi nhanh
- stop ( v ) : dừng lại
- straight ahead : đi thẳng
- must ( v ) : phải
* Check Vo : Slap the board
<b> Structure :</b>



<b>Bắt buộc ai đó phải làm gì :</b>
<b>S + must + V-inf </b>


Ex: You must do exercises


<b>Khơng được làm gì :</b>
<b>S + must not + V-inf</b>


<b> </b>Ex : You must not talk in class.


<i><b>4. Listen. Which sign? Number the sign as you </b></i>
<i><b>hear :</b></i>


1 – c : You can’t turn right here.


2 – d : There’s a stop sign. I must stop.
3 – h : You can park your car here.
4 – a : You must slow down. There’s an
intersection ahead.


5 – g : You can enter that road.
6 – b : We can turn lleft here.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

- Ss: listen & repeat


- Call some good Ss to read aloud
- Correct the mistakes


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :



- Remind Ss the questions that
they have learnt


Ss : copy


8 – e : You can’t park you car here.
<i><b>5. Play with words</b></i>


<i><b>6. Remember :</b></i>


Mr. Quang drives a truck.
He is driving it now.
You can park here.


You can’t ( = can not ) park here.
You must slow down.


You mustn’t go fast.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> :- Learn all the new words and do exercises</b></i>


- Prepare : Grammar practice


<i>Date of preparation:08/12/2010</i> <i> Week : 18</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 52</i>


<b>GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to remind the knowledge that
they’ve learnt


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : - Present simple
-Present Progressive
-Modal verbs : Can , Must
-Prepositions


 Vocabulary : consolidate all the words they have learnt


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> :


- Have Ss match the prepositions
with their meaning


Ss : match


<i><b>* Matching</b></i>



To the left of đối diện
In phía sau


In front of phía bên phải
Behind trong


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<i><b></b></i>
<b>B. Activity 1: </b>


- Review the present simple tense
and guides them to do exercises
Ss : do exercises


<b> </b>


<b> C. Activity 2: </b>


- Review the present progressive
tense and guide them to do


exercises


Ss : do exercises


<b> </b>
<b> </b>


<b> D. Activity 3: </b>



- Review the prepositions and
guides them to do exercises
Ss : do exercises


<b>E. Activity 4: </b>


- T: ask
Ss : answer


- Remind and get Ss to complete
Ss : listen and complete


- Get Ss to complete the picture
quiz.


To the right of phía trước


<i><b>1. Present simple tense</b></i><b> :</b>


 Khẳng định : S + V-s/es + O


 Phủ định : S + don’t / doesn’t + V + O
 Nghi vaán : Do/ Does + S + O ?


a) Go / go


b) Travel / travels
c) Walk / don’t walk


Does / walk / walks



<i><b>2. Present progressive tense</b></i><b> : </b>


a. Minh is riding his bike.
b. They are waiting for a bus.
c. She is watching television.
d. We are playing soccer.
e. He is listening to music.
f. They are walking to school.
g. He is traveling to Ha Noi.
<i><b>3. Prepositions :</b></i>


Look at the food store. A girl is in the store. A
boy is waiting in front of the store. There are
mountains behind the store and some houses
opposite it. There are some trees to the left of
store. There is a truck to the right of the store.


<i><b>4. Questions words </b></i><b>:</b>


a. Where
b. Who
c. What
d. What


<i><b>5. Contract : Present simple and progressive :</b></i>
a. play / are playing


b. rides / is riding
c. go / are going


d. walk / am walking
e. drives / us driving
<i><b>6. Must or mustn’t :</b></i>


a. Must / mustn’t


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

<b>F. Consolidation</b> :
T : remind the knowledge


c. Must / mustn’t
<i><b>7. Can and can not :</b></i>


a. can’t
b. can
c. can’t


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Write all the answer in their notebook</b></i>


<i>Date of preparation:08/12/2010</i> <i> Week : 18</i>


<i>Date of teaching : …………</i>


<i> Period : 53</i>


<b>ÔN TẬP HỌC KỲ I</b>
<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able consolidate general knowledge
of grammar, vocabulary from unit 1 to unit 8.



<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : remind sts all the structure they have learnt
 Vocabulary : consolidate all the words they have learnt


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card,sub-board


<b>V/ Procedures</b><i><b> :</b></i>


<b>1. To be :</b>


Affirmative : S + be + N Negative : S + be not + N
Interrogative : Be + S + N ?


I <sub></sub> am she, he, it <sub></sub> iswe, they, you <sub></sub> are


<b>2. Present simple tense :</b>


S + V-s/es Ex : He watches television.


Chú ý : Ngôi thứ 3 số ít động từ được thêm s / es


<b>3. Present progressive :</b>


Affirmative : S + be + V-ing


Negative : S + be not + V-ing


Interrogative : Be + S + V-ing ?


Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn thường được dùng với các trạng từ chỉ thời gian : now, right
now, at the moment , at the present.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<i><b></b></i>
---Ex : She is listening to music at the moment.


Is she listening to music at the moment?
She isn’t listening to music at the moment.


<b>4. Prepositions :</b>


on : trên in : trong behind : phía sau


in front of : phía trước to the left of : phía bên trái
to the right of : phía bên phải opposite : đối diện


<b>5. Modal verbs :</b>


S + can / can’t + V-inf Ex : I can play soccer.
S + must / mustn’t + V-inf Ex : We mustn’t go fast.


<b>6. Question and answer about quality :</b>


How many + N + are there ? - There is / are + quality


Ex : How many students are there in your class? - There are 47 students.


<b>7. Occupations : </b>



What do / does + S + do ? - S + be + ( a/ an ) occupation
Ex : What do you do ? – I’m a student


What does she do ? – She is an engineer.


<b>8. Position of Adjectives :</b>


S + be + adj Ex : Phong ’s school is big.
S + be + a / an + adj + N Ex : This is a beautiful house.


<b>9. On + street’s name :</b> Ex : I live on Tran Phu street.


<b>10. In + city / town / country</b> Ex : She lives in the city.


<b>11. Possessive adjectives :</b>


I <sub></sub> my she <sub></sub> her he <sub></sub> his


You <sub></sub> your it <sub></sub> its we <sub></sub> our
they <sub></sub> their


<b>12. Exercises :</b>


<i>I/ Chọn động từ thích hợp để điền vào chỗ trống :</i>


1. After school, Hoa………..sport with her classmates . ( is playing / play / are
playing / plays )


2. Phuong & Mai ………to the movie theatre now.( are walking/ walk/ is walking/


walks )


3. David’s sister …………to London now. ( are traveling/ is traveling/ travels / travel )
4. I………..my bike to school every morning. ( rides/ are riding / is riding / ride )
5. Her friends …………..very nice. ( is / am / are / be )


II/ .Vịết các động từ sau đúng thì cho mỗi câu


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

2. He (not go)……… often to the movies on Sunday nights.
3. His mother (cook)……….in the kitchen now.


4. We ( be )………. students., we ( be not )……….. teachers.
5. I ( go )………. to Hanoi next week.


6. Where Mai (be )……… now? She ( play )………. in the garden.
7. Tomorrow is Sunday. I ( do )……… the house work.


8. The teacher ( read )……… the dialogue at moment and we ( listen ) to
her.


<i><b>III. Điền giới từ thích hợp vào trong câu</b></i>


1. The students can stay at home ………..Sundays.


2. He is helping his mum ………doing the housework.
3. I’m ………..Vietnam.


4. We always go ……….school ………..foot.
5. The baby always gets ………. ……… 7.00.
6. We must do morning exercises………the morning.


<i><b>IV. Hoàn tất đoạn văn sau sau đó trả lời các câu hỏi bên dưới</b></i>


Hi. My name (1)……… Hoa. I’m twelve years old. Now I (2). in grade 6. I live (3)
……… my parents (4) ……Buon Ma Thuot City. My country is very beautiful. We have
a lot (5) …… mountains and rivers.


<i><b>Questions</b></i>


1. What’s her name? 2. How old is she?


3. Which grade is she in? 4. Who does she live with?
5. Where does she live? 6. Is BMT a beautiful city?


School: Ñoan Ket Secondary <b>KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ I - NĂM HỌC 2007-2008</b>
Class : 6 <b>MÔN : TIẾNG ANH </b>


SBD... Thời gian: 45 phút ( không kể thời gian giao đề )<b> </b>


<b>I </b><i><b>.Chọn từ/ cụm từ thích hợp để điền vào chỗ trống ( 4 điểm)</b></i>


1. Every morning, I ...to school at 6 o’clock a. go b. goes c. does
go d. to go


2. His apartment is ... the fourth floor. a. in b. on c. at
d. from


3. Minh ... his face in the morning. a. wash b. to wash c.
washs d. washes


4. We ...to music in the evening. a. no listen b.


don’t listen


c. not listen d. doesn’t
listen


5...are you? Fine, thanks. a How many b. How old c. How
d. How much


6... grade is she in? a. Which b. What c. When
d. Where


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<i><b></b></i>
---7. What time do classes start? – They start ……… a. on Monday b.
every day


c. at seven o’clock d. at
eleven


8. Here, you can turn ………. a. right b. ahead c. gray
d. to


9. A farmer works on ……… a. school b. hospital c. house
d. farm


10. What ………he doing? – He is learning English. a. are b. is c.
does d. do


11. How many tables ………in our class? a. is there b. are there c. there
is d. there a



12. …………is that? That is Minh. a. What b. Where c. Who
d. Which


13. Are you …………English now? a. read b. to read c.
reading d. reads


14. We often ………television every night. a. watch b. read c.
write d. see


15. I live …………the city with my parents. a. in b. on c.
with d. at


16. ……….is she? She is twelve. a How many b. How old c. How
d. How much


<i><b>II/ Đọc kỹ đoạn văn rồi trả lời các câu hỏi sau (2ms</b></i><b>. )</b><i><b> </b></i>


Mai is twelve years old. She is in grade 7. She lives in a house with her mother,
father and her brother, Hung. Their house is next to a post office. In the neigh
hood, there is a hotel, a supermarket, a museum, and a stadium. Her father works
in a hospital. Her mother works in the market. Every day, Mai goes to school at six
forty-five. She has classes from seven to fifteen past eleven.


1. How many people are there in Mai’s


house? ...
2. What’s her brother’s


name? ...
3. What is next to her



house? ...
4. Where does Mai’s father


work? ...
<i><b>III/ Laøm theo yêu cầu trong ngặc (3ms. )</b></i>


1. The boys (play) ... soccer in the afternoon. ( chia động từ đúng
trong ngoặc )


2. My teacher usually goes to school ………motorbike ( điền giới từ thích hợp
vào chỗ trống)


3. What’s your name? Her name is Mai. ( Gạch chân lỗi sai và sửa)
………


4. What ... your sister (do) ... now?( chia động từ
đúng trong ngoặc )


5. I (be)... thirteen years old.( chia động từ đúng trong
ngoặc )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

A B
1. How many floors does your school have?


2. How many classrooms are there in your
school?


3. Where is your classroom?
4. Where do you live?



a. I live on Nguyen Du
street.


b. It’s on third floor.
c. It has three floors.
d. There are seventeen.
School: Ñoan Ket Secondary <b>KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ I - NĂM HỌC 2007-2008</b>
Class : 6 <b>MÔN : TIẾNG ANH </b>


<b>Đáp án </b>


I/ I. ( 4 điểm ) . Mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 đđiểm


1. a 2.b 3.d 4.b
5. c 6. a 7. c 8.a


9.d 10. b 11. b 12. c


13. c 14. a 15. a 16. c


II/ ( 2 điểm ) . Mỗi câu đúng được 0,5 đđiểm
1. There are four people in her house.


2. His name is Hung.


3. Her house is next to a post office.
4. He works in a hospital.


III( 3 điểm ) . Mỗi câu đúng được 0,5 đđiểm


1. The boys play soccer in the afternoon.


2. My teacher usually goes to school by motorbike.
3. What’s <b>your</b> name? Her name is Mai => her
What’s your name? Her name is Mai => My
4. What is your sister doing now?


5. I am thirteen years old.


6. I am a student and I go to my school every morning by bike.
IV/ ( 5 điểm ) . Mỗi câu đúng được 0,25 đđiểm


1:c 2:d 3:c 4:a


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>---KẾ HOẠCH GIẢNG DẠY</b>


TIẾNG ANH 6


<b>HỌC KỲ II</b>


LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011


Unit 9 55 A1 + A2 P.96 - 97


56 A3 + A4 + A5a + A7 P.97 - 99


The body 5 57 B1 P. 100



58 B2 + B3 P. 101


( P. 96 - 103 ) 59 B1 + B4 + B5 + B7 100 - 103


60 A1 + A2 + A5 + A8 104 - 107


Unit 10 61 A3 + A4 + A6 +A8 105 -107


Staying healthy 5 62 B1 + B2 + B3 108 - 109


63 B4 + B5 + B6 110 - 111


P. 104 -113 64 C1 + C2 + C3 + C4 + C5 112-113


Unit 11 65 A1 + A5 114 - 115


66 A2 + A3 +A4 116 - 117


What do you 5 67 A2 + A5 116+


upload.12
3doc.net


eat ? 68 B1 + B2 119 -120


( P. 114 - 121 ) 69 B3 + B4 + B5 + B6 120 -121


Grammar practice 70 ôn tập 122 - 123


<b>Kiểm tra</b> 71 kiểm tra 1 tiết



72 Chữa bài kiểm tra


Unit 12 73 A1 + A2 + A6 124 - 125


74 A3 + A4 +A5 + A6 125 - 126


Sports and 5 75 B1 + B2 + B3 +B4 + B5 +


B6 127 - 129


pastimes 76 C1 + C2 + C3 + C4 130 - 131


( P. 124 - 133 ) 77 C5 + C6 + C7 132 - 133


Unit 13 78 A1 134 - 135


79 A2 + A3 135


Activities 5 80 A4 + A5 136 - 137


and seasons 81 B1 138 - 139


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

<i>Date of pre: 01/01/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 20</i>
<i>Date of tea: 04/01/2011</i>


<i> Period : 55</i>


<b>UNIT 9 : THE BODY</b>



<i><b>Lesson 1: Section A – </b></i><b>PARTS OF THE BODY (A1;</b> 2)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to learn some nouns to talk about
parts of the body


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : - The present simple tense


 Vocabulary : head , chest, shouder(s), leg(s) , . . .


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; rub out and remember ; simon says ; . . .


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card ,sub-board


<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i> :


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> :
- Play “ Shark attack “
Ss : do as direct




<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce parts


of the body


Ss : look at the picture and listen to
the teacher


- Say the new words as pointing to
the picture and ask Ss to repeat
Ss : listen and copy down - repeat
- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


<i><b>*Shark attack </b></i>
- - - -body


<i><b>1. Listen and read. </b></i>
 Vocabulary :
- head (pict.) đầu
- chest (pict.) ngực
- shoulder(s) (pict.) vai
- arm(s) (pict.) cánh tay
- hand(s) (pict.) bàn tay
- leg(s) (pict.) chân


- finger(s) (pict.) ngón tay
- toe(s)ngốn chân


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

<i><b></b></i>
--- Label the black board picture as



you pre-teach.


- Rub out and remember the labels
- Get Ss to re-label the picture


<b>C. Practice :</b>


- Have Ss play game “ Simon says “
Ss : do as directed


Simon says touch your left hand
Simon says touch your fingers
Touch your left foot!


Simon says touch your left foot
Simon says touch your right foot
Touch your head!


Touch your toes!


Simon says touch your toes
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs
Ss: Do as directed


<b> </b>


<b> D. Consolidation</b> :



- Call 2 students go to the board (A
student shows him/herself and call
out name parts of the body, other
writes on the board.)


- Correct the mistakes


head


<i><b>* . Simon says </b></i>


Simon says touch your head
Simon says touch your chest
Simon says touch your feet
Touch your shoulders!


Simon says touch your shoulders
Simon says touch your legs
Touch your head!


Touch your shoulders!
Simon says touch your head
<i><b>2. Practice with a partner</b></i>
Picture drill (A1-P.96)
<i><b>* Ex: A2 (P.97)</b></i>


A: What’s that?


B: That’s his [ head]
A: What are those?



B: Those are his [shoulders]
* Writing


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> - Learn the new words & write all the answer in the notebooks</b></i>


<i><b> - Prepare : Unit 9 : A3-7</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

<i>Period : 56+57</i>


<b>UNIT 9 : THE BODY</b>


<i><b>Lesson 2: Section A – </b></i><b>PARTS OF THE BODY (A3-7</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to learn parts of the body and
how to describe the form of the person


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : - The present simple tense
- Adjectives


 Vocabulary : tall, short, fat , thin, heavy, light


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; hang man,repetition, grid


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card, sub-board



<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i> <i><b>:</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Play “ Hang man “
Ss : do as direct


<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat
- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed
- Let Ss play the game




<i><b>* Hang man </b></i>


1.shoulders 1
2. fingers 2
3. chest 3
4. feet


5. arms 5 6
6. legs 4
7 8
<i><b>3. Listen and repeat.</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>
- tall (pict.) :cao
- short(pict.): thaáp
- fat (pict.) : mập
- thin (pict.) : gầy
- heavy (pict.): nặng
- light (pict.) : nheï


* Check Vo: Slap the board
* Noughts and crosses


tall big Fat


thin Short Small


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<i><b></b></i>



<b> C. Practice</b> :


- Stick 4 pictures on the board.
- Let Ss listen to the teacher,
observe 4 pictures. If techer’s
sentence is true, they repeat. If it
is wrong, they keep silent.


Ss: a, repeat repeat


b. silent repeat repeat
c. silent repeat repeat
d. silent silent
repeat repeat
- Let Ss listen to the cassette and
choose the right picture.


- Ss: listen to the cassette then
choose the right picture


- Let Ss listen to the cassette the 2
paragraphs about Chi and Tuan
Ss: Listen & try to remember the
details of these 2 people


- Ask them to retell about Chi and
Tuan


Ss: Try to describe Chi and Tuan


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss all the new words
that they have learnt


Ss : copy and remember


quiet light Heavy


Ex: She is tall - or – She’s a tall girl.


<i><b>4. Which picture? Listen and choose the right </b></i>
<i><b>picture. </b></i>


* T/F repetition drill (A4 – P.98)
Teacher:


Picture a. She’s thin She’s tall
Picture b. He’s thin He’s short He’s fat
Picture c. He’s small He’s tall He’s heavy
Picture d. She’s thin She’s tall


She’s short She’s fat
* Answer keys:


1. d 2. c 3. b 4. a
* Tape transcript:


<i><b>1. She’s a short girl. She is fat.</b></i>
<i><b>2. He’s a fat man. He’s tall.</b></i>


<i><b>3. He’s a short man. He’s fat.</b></i>


<i><b>4. She’s a thin woman. She’s tall. </b></i>
<i><b>5. Listen and read</b></i>


Note: gymnast: vận động viên thể dục


<i><b>6. Practice with a partner</b></i>


* <i>Describe the picture in exrcise A5</i>


<i><b>7. Remember : (P.99 )</b></i>


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> - Learn all the new words and write all the answer in the </b></i>


notebooks


- Prepare : Unit 9: <b>B1</b>


<i>Date of pre : 10/01/2011 </i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 21</i>


<i>Date of tea : 11/01/2011</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

<b>UNIT 9 : THE BODY</b>


<i><b>Lesson 3: Section B – </b></i><b>FACES (B1</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to learn face vocabulary (nouns


and adjectives) to describe Faces.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : adjective


 Vocabulary : eye, ear, lip, tooth, nose,. . .


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pelmanism, rub out and remember, slap the board


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b>: pictures; flash card, sub-board, charts of colors


<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i> <i><b>:</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Revision : </b>


-Have Ss play game “pelmanism”
Ss : do as directed


<b>B. Presentation : </b>


- Draw a face on the board , point
each detail on the face and mark
the name of each detail


- Look at the picture drawn on the
board.



- Pay attention to each part of the
face as the teacher introduces.
- Ask them to repeat the new
words as pointing to the details.
Ss : listen and copy down - repeat
- Have some students go to the
board, point to the details and say
the name of each detail, then
erase the words and ask some
others to redo.


- Go to the board point to the
details on the face and say the
names of the details.


- Try to redo this exercise.


* Pelmanism


<i><b>fat</b></i> <i><b>tall</b></i> <i><b>heavy</b></i> <i><b>big</b></i> <i><b>Noisy</b></i>


<i><b>thin</b></i> <i><b>short</b></i> <i><b>light</b></i> <i><b>small</b></i> <i><b>Quiet</b></i>


<i><b>1. Listen and repeat :</b></i>
<b> Vocabulary : </b>
- eye (pict.) : maét
- ear (pict.) : tai
- lip (pict.) : môi
- teeth (pict.) : răng
- hair (pict.) : tóc


- nose (pict.) : mũi
- mouth (pict.) : mieäng
* Check Vo: R & R


<b>eye</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

<i><b></b></i>
--- Use picture to describe a face


and explain the meaning of
adjectives


<b>C. Practice :</b>


- Ask Ss to look at their partners’
face and describe


- Practice in groups. Look at their
partners’face and describe.


- Have Ss work in groups to play
this game


Ss : do as directed


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Have Ss write 5 complete
sentences to describe their friends


Ss : Do as teacher says


<b> Adjectives</b>
- round : tròn


- oval : hình trái xoan
- full : đầy, đầy đặn
- thin : gay, mảnh
- long : dài


- short: thấp, ngắn
* Speaking




<i><b> Wordsquare</b></i>


H A I R X F


N E F A T I


E O Y F E N


A B S E E G


R T H E T E


M O U T H R


H E A V Y S



hair , fat , see , the , mouth , out , heavy
ear, arm, near , toe, to, feet, teeth , fingers
nose ,eye


* Writing


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn all the new words and write all the answer in the</b></i>


notebooks


- Prepare Unit 9: <b>B2,3</b>


<i><b> </b></i>


<i> </i>


<i>Date of pre : 10/01/2011</i> <i> Week : 21</i>


<i>Date of tea : 11/01/2011</i>


<i> Period : 58</i>


<b> </b>


<b>UNIT 9: THE BODY</b>


<i><b>Lesson 4: Section B – </b></i><b>FACES (B2, 3</b>)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

to describe features


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : adjective


 Vocabulary : eye, ear, lip, tooth, nose,. . .


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pelmanism, rub out and remember, slap the board


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b>: pictures; flash card, sub-board, charts of colors


<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i> <i><b>:</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Play “ Jumble Words “
Ss : do as direct




<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat
( Note : We don’t need ORANGE


and PURPLE for describing


people )


- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Have Ss work in groups to do
this exercise.


- Let Ss play this game.
Ss : do as directed


<i><b>* Jumble Words</b></i>


- yees = eyes
- hari = hair


- cefa = face
- spli = lips
- sone = nose


- dreshouls = shoulders
<i><b>3. Listen and repeat. Colors</b></i>
<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- black (pict.) : màu đen
- white (pict.) : màu trắng



- gray/grey(BE) (pict.):màu xám /hoa râm (tóc)
- red (pict.) : màu đỏ


- orange (pict.) : màu cam
- yellow (pict.) : màu vàng
- green (pict.) : màu xanh lá cây
- blue (pict.) : màu xanh da trời
- brown (pict.) : màu nâu


- purple (pict.) : màu tím
* Check Vo : Slap the board


<b> Finding friends ( with answer key)</b>
She/ He


has . . . eyes hair lips Teeth


black 


brown  


gray  


white  


red   


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

<i><b></b></i>



--- Give some toys, show a doll,
model with a good student.
- Have them practice in pairs.
- Call some pairs to play the role
in front of the class


<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Have Ss work in pairs to do this
exercise.


Ss : do as direcrted


- Call some good Ss to read aloud
- Correct the mistakes




<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss the questions that
they have learnt


Ss : copy


yellow 


blue 


green 



Ex:- She has brown hair.
- She has green eyes.
. . .


<b> Dialogue build</b>


Hoa: I have a new doll.
Mai: What color is her hair?
Hoa: It’s black.


Mai: What color are her eyes ?
Hoa: They’re brown.


<i><b>4. Practice with a partner.</b></i>
* Picture drill (B3 – P. 101)
Example exchanges


A: What color is her hair?
B: It’s [ black]


A: What color are her eyes?
B: They’re [ brown]


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> :- Learn all the new words and do exercises</b></i>


- Prepare : B1,4,5,6,7


<i> </i> <i> </i>



<i>Date of pre : 12/01/2011 Week : 21</i>
<i>Date of tea : 13/01/2011</i>


<i> Period : 59</i>


<b>UNIT 9: THE BODY</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5: Section B – </b></i><b>FACES (B</b>1, 4, 5, 6, 7)


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice in body
vocabulary to describe people


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

 Vocabulary: eye, ear, lip, tooth, nose, . .


<b>III. Techniques:</b> pelmanism, rub out and remember, slap the board


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b>: pictures; flash card, sub-board, charts of colors


<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i> <i><b>:</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Let Ss sing this song
Ss : do as direct


<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


-T sticks the picture.


-Ss look at the picture and have a
guess and fill words in the blanks.
-Give feedback.


-Look at the gap fill and remark.
-Give structures.


-Have Ss put the words in the
correct order.(individually)
-T reads the text, Ss repeat.
-ss check their prediction.


<b>-</b>T reminds ‘Or questions’
Ex:Is she thin or fat?
She is thin


-Ask Ss to answer the questions
(play : lucky numbers)


1:a, 2:c, 3:LN, 4:d, 5:b, 6:e, 7:LN,


<i><b>* Sing a song (B6 – P.102 )</b></i>



Head and shoulders, knees and toes
<i><b>1. Listen and repeat. (a-f)</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>


- round a round face
- oval an oval


- full full lips
- thin thin


- long long hair
- short short


<b>B.Pre-reading (B4)</b>
<b>1.Gap fill (prediction</b>


Mrs Chi is (1)... and thin. She has a (2) ...
face, (3) ..., (4)...hair, (5) ...eyes, a (6) ...
nose, (7) ... lips and smal; (8) ...teeth


<b>2.Model sentence</b>


She haslong hair.
He has full lips
You have short hair.


*<b>Checking:</b><i>Put the words in correct order.</i>



a.eyes / Lan/ brown /has
b.thin / has / she / lips
c.face / he / oval / has /an.


<b>C.While-reading</b>


<b>1.Answer key (gap fill)</b>


1.tall 2.round 3.long 4.black
5. brown 6. small 7.thin 8.white


<b>2.Comprehension questions: Lucky numbers</b>


a.Miss Chi’s hair is long.
b. Her eyes are brown.
c.Her hair is black
d. Her nose is small.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

<i><b></b></i>


---8:LN


-T gives answer key.


-T writes the words on the board
-T reads the paragroph which
contain the words. Ss listen and
write number1,2,3...for the words.
-Give feedback



<b>C. Practice</b>


-Ss listen and write the number
next to the correct picture.


-Ss listen and do the exercise
-T gives the answwer key


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Remind Ss the questions &
words that they have learnt


e. Her lips are full.


<b>*The paragraph</b>


Hoa is short and thin.She has an oval face.She
has long hair.She has bronw eyes and thin lips.


 <b>Answer key</b>


1.an oval face 2.long hair
3.brown 4.thin lips


<i><b>5. Listen</b></i> : <i>Matching</i> (B5)


1:c 2:a 3:d 4:b


<i><b>The Tape transcript:</b></i>



<i>1.He has short hair.He has a round face.He has </i>
<i>a big nose.He has full lips</i>


<i>2.He has shport hair. He has an oval face.He </i>
<i>has a small nose.He has thin lips</i>


<i>3.She has long hair. She has an oval face.She </i>
<i>has a bib nose.She has thin lips.</i>


<i>4.She has long hair. She has a round face.She </i>
<i>has a small nose.She has full lips.</i>


<i><b>7. Remember</b></i>


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> :- </b></i>-write a five sentences which describe a your friend.


- Prepare Unit 10 ‘A 1,2,5’


- Practice reading B6 and learn the remember
<i>Date of pre : 12/01/2011 Week : 21</i>
<i>Date of tea : 13/01/2011</i>


<i> Period : 60</i>


<b>UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY </b>


<i>Lesson 1- Section A : </i><b>HOW DO YOU FEEL</b>? (A 1,2,5)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, the Ss can talk about how we feel using


adjective of physical state.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : How do you feel? I feel ...


How dows she / he feel? She / He feels...


 Vocabulary : hungry, thirsty, full, hot, clod tired.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. </b></i>Procedures :


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b> A. Warm up</b>


-T sticks the picture of B 4 / 101 on
the board.


-Then ask Ss to describe about ‘Chi’
-Call on one student.


-Ss work in pairs, take it in turns to
point at the different pictures on page
104, 105 and ask and answer


S1; What’s this color?
S2: It’s green.



<b> B.Presentation</b>


-T introduces new words by using the
pictures


-read the new words.


-Play the tape again and let sts repeat
Ss : - Repeat after teacher .


<b>-</b> Listen and copy down.


<b>-</b> Repeat (chorus) then work in pairs.
Sts match the words in column A with
the one in column B


- Point the picture then ask and
answer.


-Ss listen and guess.


- Explain and give model structures
<b>C.Practice</b>


Let Ss practice in paurs


<b>1.Pre-teach: Vocabulary :</b>


-hungry (adj)
-thirsty (adj)


-full (adj)
-hot (adj)
-cold (adj)
-tired (adj)


-to feel (trans)


<b>*Checking</b> : <i>Matching</i>


hungry
thirsty
full
hot
cold
tired


lạnh
nặng
đnhẹ
khát
mệt
no


<b>2.Structures</b>


<i><b>H</b><b>ỏ</b><b>i đáp về cảm giác</b></i>


<b>How + do +you /we/ they +feel?</b>
<b>How + does + she / he +feel?</b>
<i><b>I am</b></i>



<i><b>She /He is +adj (thirsty)</b></i>
<i><b>You / we /they are</b></i>


1.Word cue drill


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

<i><b></b></i>


---Stick pictures of A 1 and A 5 /106
-Ss practice asking and answering in
pairs


Ss listen and match the right numbers
with the pictures


-Give feedback


<b> </b>


<b> D.Consolidation</b>


-Ask a student to think the feeling but
wuthout talking


-The rest of the class asks him or her
to find out the feeling.


The student can only answer yes /no


hungry thirsty hot



cold tired full


Ex: How do you feel?
S2: I’m hungry.


<b>2.Picture Drill</b>


S1: How does she/ he feel?
S2: She /He feels thirsty


<b>3.Matching</b> ( A 5)


Phương: b Nhan: a Ba: f Hương: d


<i><b> The tape transcript</b></i>


<i><b>Nhan is hungry.He;d like noodle.</b></i>
<i><b>Phuong is thirsty. she’d like a drink.</b></i>
<i><b>Ba is full</b></i>


<i><b>Huong is cold.</b></i>


*. <i>Guessing game</i>


Ex:S1:Are you thirty?
S2: No, I am not
S3:Are you hot?
S2: Yes, I am



<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn new words and structures by heart.


- Prepare next part (A 3,4)


<i>Date of pre : 17/01/2011 </i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 22</i>


<i>Date of tea : 18/01/2011</i>


<i> Period : 61</i>


<b>UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY </b>


<i> Lesson 2- Section A : </i> HOW DO YOU FEEL? (A 3,4)


<b>I . Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, the sts can know how to read a dialouge
and recognize polite offers and request.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : What would you like? I’d like some / a.../ to...


What about you?


Would you like noodles?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

<b>IV. Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. Procedures</b></i> :


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b> A.Warm up</b>


-Ss ask and answwer about the
picture of A 1 / 104 (pair work)


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> B.Pre-reading</b></i>


T: plays the tape and ask sts to
listen carefully.


Sts : listen


T: -explains some news words
- read the new words.


- Play the tape again and let sts
repeat


Sts : - Repeat after teacher .


<b>-</b> Listen and copy down.


<b>-</b> Repeat (chorus) then work in
pairs.


<i><b>-</b></i>Let Ss listen the dialouge and
conplete the it, without looking
their books.



-Give feedback


T: explain the grammar.
-Ss listen


<b> C.While –reading</b>


S1: How does he feel?
S2: He is full


<b>1.pre-teach</b>
<b> Vocabulary :</b>


-an orange (pict)
-juice (n) (trans)
-orange juice (n) (trans)
-a drink (examp)


-noodles (n) (trans)


-would like (‘d like) = want (v) (trans)
-would not = wouldn’t


<b>2.Predicdialouge</b>


Nam: How do you feel?


Lan: I’m .<i>hot...</i> and ...<i>thirsty...</i>



Nam: What would you like?


Lan: I’d like some...<i>orange juice</i>...what
about you?


Nam: I’m...<i>hungry.</i>.... I’d like some …<i>noodles…</i>
<b> Grammar: Would you like....?</b>


<b>-H</b><i><b>ỏ</b><b>i ai mu</b><b>ố</b><b>n đi</b><b>ề</b><b>u gì m</b><b>ộ</b><b>t cách l</b><b>ị</b><b>ch s</b><b>ự</b></i>


<i>What would you like? =what do you want?</i>


<i><b>-</b><b>Đư</b><b>a ra l</b><b>ờ</b><b>i m</b><b>ờ</b><b>i l</b><b>ị</b><b>ch s</b><b>ự</b></i>


<i>Would you like a cup of tea?</i>
<i>Would you like to go with us?</i>


<i><b>+Responses</b></i>


<i>(+)Yes, plase.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<i><b></b></i>


---Ss read the dialouge and check
their prediction.


-Give answwer key.
-T reads the dialogue
-Ss listen and repeat.



Ss read it again and match the key
words to the people.


-Let Ss look at the form and
practice asking and answering
-Guide ss to read the dialogue
then make the same dialogue
( give statements)


<b>D.Post-reading (A 6)</b>


-Ss read the dialouge and check
Then make the same dialouge


<i>(-) No, thank you.I;m not thirsty.</i>
<i> No, I’d like a glass of water.</i>


<b>1.Checking prediction</b>


<b>2.Matching</b> (with answer key)


Lan Nam Ba


Hot hot
Tired




thirsty
full



hungry hungr
y
noodles noodl


es
a drink/


orange
juice


drink


to sit down to sit
down
S1:How does Lan feel?


S2;She is thirsty


S1: What would she like?


S2: She’d like some orange juice
What’s the matter with you?
a.hot / cold / drink


b. hungry / noodles
c.thirsty / a drink.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> - </b></i>Learn all the structures by heart and do exercises



- Prepare next part (B 1,2,3)


<i>Date of pre : 19/01/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 22</i>


<i>Date of tea : 20/01/2011</i> <i> Period : 62</i>


<b>UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY </b>
<i><b>Lesson 3 : B FOOD AND DRINK (B 1,2,3)</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : There is some rice


There isn’t any rice
Is there any rice?


 Vocabulary : apple, banana, water...


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; guessing, communicative approach.


<b>IV.Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, real objects


<i><b>V.Procedures</b></i> :


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up :</b>


- Call on two Ss to go to the board
and write down.



<b>B. Presentation </b>


T: - explains some news words
and read the new words.


<b>-</b> Play the tape again and let sts
repeat


Sts : - Repeat after teacher .


<b>-</b> Listen and copy down.


<b>-</b> Repeat (chorus) then work in
pairs.


Let Ss listen and write the words
in right column.


T reads: water, rice, banana, milk,
vegetables,aspple, meat,orange,
bread, noodles, hot drink, orange
juice, cold drink.


-Ss look at the table, then practice
asking and answering.


T Sts : practice in pairs


<b> Next work</b>



<i><b> noodles </b></i>
<i><b> milk</b></i>
<i><b>1.Pre-teach.</b></i>


-an apple ( realia/pict)
-rice (pict)


-water (realia/ pict)
-food (examp)
-milk (trans)
-meat (pict)
-an orange *(pict)
-a banana (pict)


-vegetables ( pict / example<i><b>)</b></i>


<i><b>*Checking: </b>Dictation list:</i> a, an, some


<b>a</b> <b>an</b> <b>some</b>


<b>banana</b>
<b>hot drink</b>
<b>cold drink</b>


<b>apple</b>
<b>orange</b>


<b>Rice,water, </b>
<b>milk,vegetable, </b>


<b>meeat,noodles, </b>
<b>orangejuice , bread</b>
<i><b>+Asking and Answering</b></i>


S1: What would you like?


S2:I’d like an apple. What would you like?
S2: I’d like some milk.


<b>3.Presentation dialogue</b>
<i><b>-</b></i>What’s for lunch / dinner?


-What’s there to drink? Có gì để uống khơng?


LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

<i><b></b></i>


---Havwe Ss stick (V)what’s for
lunch on the list while reading.
-Give feedback.


-T give model sentences and
explains “ some / any”


<b> C.Practice : </b>


-Have Ss look at the pictures on
B3 then ask answer (pairs work)



<b>D.Futher –Practice</b>


- Have Ss free talk,bey on model
above


<i><b>*Comprehention (with answer key)</b></i>


meat
rice
noodles
fruice
water
milk


<i><b>*Model sentences</b></i>


Ex:There’s some rice
Is there any rice?
There isn’t any rice.


<i><b>Note:</b></i>


<i><b>-Some: </b></i>dùng trong câu khẳng đđịnh


<i><b>-Any: </b></i> Dùng trong câu phủ định và nghi vấn


Ex: Are there any bananas?
Yes, there are some bananas<i><b>.</b></i>



<i><b>* Picture drill </b></i>(B3)


<i><b>-</b></i>Is there any...?


Yes, there is some ...
No,there isn’s any ...
-Are there any ...?
Yes, there are some ...
No, there aren’t any ...


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: - Learn Remember by heart and do exercises


-Prepare next part ‘B4.5’


<i>Date of pre : 19/01/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 22</i>


<i>Date of tea : 20/01/2011</i>


<i> Period : 63</i>


<b>UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY </b>
<i><b>Lesson 4 : B FOOD AND DRINK (B4,5,6)</b></i>


<b>I . Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, the sts can know how to use countable and
uncountable food and drimnk nouns, polite requests “I’d like some...” and polite
offers “ What would you like?”


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : I’d like some .../



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

 Vocabulary : chicken, fish, fruit, bread.


<b>III.Teachniques:</b>pair work, communicative approach


<b>IV. Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette


<b>V.Procedur</b>es


<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


-Use the new words of B1 /108.
-Guide Ss to play the game


<b> B. Presentation </b>


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
carefully.


Ss : listen


- Explain some news words by
using pictures


- Read the new words.


- Play the tape again and let Ss
repeat



Ss : - Repeat after teacher .
- Listen and copy down.


- Repeat (chorus) then work in
pairs.


- Point the pictures and ask Ss
answer. (Whole class)


-Have Ss listen and match
-Give feedback


- Read the dialouge, Ss listen and
repeat.


<i><b>* Slap the board</b></i>


<i><b>1.Pre-teach Vocabulary :</b></i>
<b>-</b>menu (n) (Trans)


-fish (n) (pict)
-chicken (n) (pict)
-fruit (n) (examp)
-bread (n) (Pict)
-beef (n) (Trans<b>)</b>
<b>*Checking:</b>


T: What’s this? / What are these?
SS: It is ... / They are ...



<i><b>2.Matching </b></i>(grid with answer key)


<b>a b</b> <b>c</b> <b>d</b> <b>e</b> <b>f</b> <b>g h</b>


<b>Nhan</b> <b>x</b> <b>x</b>


<b>Tuan</b> <b>x</b> <b>x</b>


<b>Huong</b> <b>x</b> <b>x</b>


<b>Mai</b> <b>x</b> <b>x</b>


<i><b> Tape transcript:</b></i>


<i> Nhan would like some chicken and some rice</i>
<i>Tuan would like some meat and some vegetables</i>
<i>Huong would like some fruit and some milk.</i>
<i>Mai would like some fish and an orange juice.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

<i><b></b></i>


---Ss: Practice in pairs
T : explain grammar
Ss :listen and copy down


<b> C.Practice</b> <b> </b>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures on
page 110 and 111, then pratice


asking and answering with the
partners


Ss : practice


T : correct pronunciation


<b> D.Consolidation:</b>


-Guide Ss to play the game.


<b> Grammar: Some /Any</b>


<i>(tính từ chỉ số lượng không xác định</i><b>)</b>


<b>Some / Any + N (không đếm dược)</b>
<b> + Ns (đếm được ở số nhiều)</b>


Ex: some chicken, sone bananas
any orange juice, any oranges


<i><b>3. Picture drill</b></i> (B 4,5)


<i>Example exchange:</i>


S1:What wou;d you like?
S2: I’d like some <i>fish.</i>


<i><b>4. Chain game</b></i>



S1: I’d like some fish


S2: I’d like some fish and I’d like some milk.
S3: I’d like ...


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn new words and the dialogue by heart


- Prepare next part ‘C’


<i>Date of pre : 24/01/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 23</i>


<i>Date of tea : 25/01/2011</i>


<i> Period : 64</i>


<b>UNIT 10 : STAYING HEALTHY </b>


<i><b>Lesson 5: Section C - MY FAVORITE FOOD (C1-5)</b></i>


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, the sts can know how to say about favorite
food and drink to contact “would you like...?” with “Do you like?


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : Do you like carrots…?


yes, I do / No, I don’t


 Vocabulary : carrots, tomato, letuce, onions, potato,...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

<b>IV. Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, real objects


<i><b>V.Procedures :</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up: </b>


-Guide Ss to play the game.
(whole class)


<b> B.Presentation</b>


- Use pictures to present new
words


- Read the new words.


- Play the tape again and let Ss
repeat


Ss : - Repeat after teacher .
- Listen and copy down.


- Repeat (chorus) then work in
pairs.


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures on
page 112 and 113 then ask and
answer by using the model


sentences


-Read the dialouge
-Ss: listen and repeat


-Ss: play the role to read the
dialouge.


- Give the model sentences
- Give note:


<i><b>* Guessing game</b></i>


S1: I’d like a /some ...
S2;Would you like an orange?
S1:No, I wouldn,t


S3:Would you like some chicken?
...


<i><b>1.Pre-teach</b></i>


-favorite (adj) (trans)


-My favorite food drink :(trans)
-a carrot (pict/realia)
-a tomato (pict /realia)
-lestuce (trans)


-apotato (pict/realia)


-bean (pict/trans)
-pea (pict/trans)
-cabbage (pict/reala)


-onion (pict/reala)
-lemonade (trans)
-iced tea (trans)
-iced coffee (tran)
-white coffee (trans)
-soda (trans)


<b>*Checking</b>: <i>Picture Drill</i>


S1:What are these?


S2:They are carrots.What are they?
S1: they are bean


<i><b>2.Presentationdialouge</b></i>


<b>* Model Sentences:</b>
<b>-</b>Do you like carrots?
Yes, I do? No, I don’t


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

<i><b></b></i>


---+Do you like...? ( dùng thân mật)
+Would you like....? ( dùng lịch
sự)<b> </b>



<b> C.Practice</b>


- Ask Ss to practice asking and
answering


Ss : practice in pairs


-Call on some pairsto talk in front
of the class


<b> D.Production</b> (B4)
-T reads the dialouge
-Ss listen and repeat.


-Then Ss make the similar the
dialouge


- Remind Ss Remember


Ss copy Remember in the text
books.(page 113 )


-Would you like some vegetables?
Yes, I would? Yes, please.


Yes, I wouldn’t / No, thank you


<i><b>* Word cues</b></i> drill


beans peas carrots milk



iced tea oranges rice apple juice
S1: Do /Would you like some beans?


S2: Yes, I do /No, I don’t


Yes, please /No, thank you.


<b>5. Remember</b>


<i>I lkie...</i>
<i>I don’t like...</i>
<i>He/she likes ...</i>
<i>He/she doesn’t like....</i>
<i>Do you like...?</i>


<i> Yes, I do ?No, I don’t</i>


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn Remember by heart and do exercises


- Prepare Unit 11: A1


<i>Date of pre : 26/01/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 23</i>


<i>Date of tea : 27/01/2011</i>


<i> Period : 65</i>


<b>UNIT 11 : WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>



<i><b>Lesson 1: Section A</b> : </i><b>AT THE STORE</b> ( A 1)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use quantifiers and
containers to talk about things people buy at trhe store.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : -Quantifiers: a kilo of.../ a gram of...


-Containers: a dozen.../ a bottle of...


 Vocabulary : bottle, cooking oil, packet, tea, box, chocolates, egg, soap...
<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, group work, communicative approach.


<b>IV. Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card, books.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b> A.Warm up:</b>


- Stick the picture on the board
- Show the picture to focus Ss’
attention on the lesson


<b>B.Presentation</b>


- Use picture to present new
words


- read the new words.



- Play the tape again and let sts
repeat


Sts : - Repeat after teacher .
- Listen and copy down.
- Repeat (chorus)


-Use A 1b /115 to help Ss’
guesses


-Call on some Ss to go to the
board and match




<b> </b>


<b> C.Practice</b>


- Read the dialouge
Ss: listen and repeat


-Then T rub out and remmember
Have Ss practice as in A 1b /115


<i><b>1.Pre-teach</b></i>


-a storekeeper (tran)
-Can I help you? (trans


-an egg (pict /drawing)
-chocolate (n) (tran)


-cooking oil (n) (pict/trans)
-soap (n) (trans)


-toothpaste (n) (trans<b>)</b>
<i><b>2.Matching</b></i>


gram of...
a can of ...
a bottle of...
a dosen...
a tube of...


a bar of ...
a packet of...
a box of...


a kilo of....


<i><b>3. Rub out and remmeber dialouge.</b></i>


<i><b>4.Picture drill</b></i>


S1: Can I help you?


S2: Yes, <i><b>a packet of tea</b></i>, please.
S1: Here you are.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

<i><b></b></i>


<b>D.Production</b>


-Guide Ss to play the game


S2: Thank you.


<b>* Substitution Drill</b>


<i>*Teacher says:</i>


water, oil,soap, peas, beans, eggs, tea, oranges,
soda<b>.</b>


<i>*Students say:</i>


I’d like a bottle of water, please.
I’d like a bar of soap, please.
. . .


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn by heart all the new words


- Prepare next part ‘ A 2’


<i>Date of pre : 26/01/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 23</i>


<i>Date of tea : 27/01/2011</i> <i> Period : 66</i>


<b>UNIT 11 : WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>



<i><b>Lesson 2: Section A</b> : </i><b>AT THE STORE</b> ( A 2)


<b>I . Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen to for
specific information about quantities for food shopping.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : How much + uncountable noun


How many + countable noun


 Vocabulary : want, need, how much, how many.
<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,guessing.


<b>IV. Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V.Procedures :</b>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up: </b>


-Use 12 cards


-Guide Ss to play the game
-Divide the class into two teams.


<i><b>* Pelmanism</b></i>



a bar of
soap a can of peas


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<b> B.Pre-listening</b>


- Give some new words
- Read the new words.


- Play the tape again and let Ss
repeat


Ss : - Repeat after teacher .


<b>-</b> Listen and copy down.


<b>-</b> Repeat (chorus) then work in
pairs.


-Ss read the dialouge and guess
the missing words.


Ss: work in pairs
-Give feedback.


<b>C.While- listening</b>


Ss: listen and check their
prediction


-T: give answer key



-Ss read the dialouge again, then
answer the questions by playing
lucky numbers


1:b,2:d, 3:a, 4:LN, 5:c, 6:LN
(The questions of A 2 /116)


<b> D.Pot-listening (A 3)</b>


-Ask Ss to listen and fill the table
with a,b,c...


<i><b>1.Pre-teach:Vocabulary :</b></i>
<b>-</b>to want (trans.)


-to need (trans.)


-Is there anything else? (trans)
-a sale girl ( pict)


-How much...? bao nhiêu...?


( dùng cho danh từ khơng đếm được)
-How many...? bao nhiêu...?
(dùng cho danh từ đếm được)


<b>2.Predict dialogue</b>


Sale girl: Can I help you?



Ba: Yes, I’d like some (1)..., please.
Sale girl: How much do you want?


Ba: (2)...grams, please.
Sale girl: Is there any things else?


Ba: : Yes, I need some (3)...
Sale girl: How many do you want?
Ba: (4)...,please.


<b>1.Checking prediction</b>


1.beef 2.200 3.eggs 4.a dozen


<b>2.Comprhension questions: Lucky numbers</b>


a.He is at the store.


b.He wants some beef and some eggs.
c.He wants two hundred gras of beef.
d.He wants a dozen eggs.


3. Listen. Match the names of the people with the things
they want.


Phuong d


Ly e,a



Mai b


LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Naêm hoïc 2010-2011


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

<i><b></b></i>


---Let Ss look at the table , ask and
answwer (If T has enough time)


Nam c


* <i><b>The tape transcript</b></i>


<i>Phuong wants a tube of thootpaste.</i>


<i>Ly wants a bar of soap and a box of chocolates.</i>
<i>Mai wants a can of soda.</i>


<i>Nam wants a packet of cookies</i>


S1: What does Phuong want?


S2: She wants a tube of toothpaste.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn by heart all the new words


- Practice reading the dialouge.
- Prepare next part ‘A 3,4 ,5’


<i>Date of pre : 07/02/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 24</i>


<i>Date of tea : 08/02/2011</i>


<i> Period : 67</i>


<b>UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>


<i><b>Lesson 3: Section A</b>: </i><b>AT THE STORE</b> (A 3, 4, 5)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice asking &
answering with “How many..? ; How much . . . ?” with “want” and “need” to talk
about quantities for shopping


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : How much + uncountable noun


How many + countable noun


 Vocabulary : want, need, how much, how many.
<b>III. Techniques:</b> pair work ; chatting,guessing.


<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>: pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V.Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up: </b>


-T reads: orange, meat,bananas,


oil, milk, bread, carrots, beef,
chocolates,chicken, rice, eggs,
apples, soap


<i><b>* Dictation lists:</b></i>


* Answer keys


HOW MUCH HOW MANY
meat, oil, milk,


bread, beef, chicken,
rice, soap


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

<b> B.Presentation</b>


- Play the tape again and let Ss
repeat


Ss : - Repeat after teacher .


- Play the role in the dialogue
- Present some structures


Ss: Listen , remember & learn these
structures by heart


<b>-</b> Give other examples





<b>C.Practice</b>


T says: Mon wants Nam to buy 4
things at the store. Guess what 4
things she needs.


- Have Ss read the dialogue silently
and check their prediction.


- Give feedback and correct the
mistakes


<b> D.Production</b>


- Ask each student to write a
shopping list. In pairs , Ss take it in
turns to be the storekeeper and the
customer


-Let Ss look at the table , ask and
answwer (If T has enough time)


<i><b>1.Presentation dialogue (A2)</b></i>


<i><b>2. Model sentences</b></i>


I need some <i><b>beef</b></i>.
want



-How much...? bao nhieâu...?


( dùng cho danh từ không đếm được)
How <i><b>much</b></i> do you want / need?
I need some <i><b>eggs</b></i>.


want


How <i><b>many</b></i> do you want / need?
-How many...? bao nhiêu...?
(dùng cho danh từ đếm được)


4. Read. Then write the shopping list in your
exercise book.


* Open prediction


Guess Read (answer key)
1.


2.
3.
4.


1. (a bottle of) cooking oil
2. (some) (2 kilos of ) rice
3. (1/2 a kilo of) beef
4. (12) ( a dozen) orange


Ex:



400 g chicken 24000 dong
½ kg beans 3000 dong
5 kg rice 35000 dong
½ kg vegetables 1500 dong
3 box of milk 12000 dong


* <i><b> Roleplay</b></i>


<i><b>Storekeeper</b></i> <i><b>Customer</b></i>


<i>Can I help you?</i>
<i>How much/many . . .</i>
<i>Any thing else?</i>
<i>That’s . . . dong, </i>
<i>please.</i>


<i>I want/need . . . </i>
<i>I’d like . . . </i>


<i>Do you have any . . . </i>
<i>. . . please .</i>


<i>. . . thank you!</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

<i><b></b></i>


--- Have Ss make sentences bey on
structures and words in the box
- Correct the mistakes



<i><b>5. Remember</b></i>


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn by heart all the new words & structures


- Practice reading the dialouge.
- Prepare next part “B1,3,4”


<i>Date of pre : 08/02/2011 Week : 24</i>


<i>Date of tea : 09/02/2011</i> <i> Period : 68</i>


<b>UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>


<i><b>Lesson 4: Section B</b>: </i><b>AT THE CANTEEN</b> (B 1,3,4)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice in
offers and requests for food and drink , revise the way to use “ some”, “a” , “an”


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : What would you like for . . . ?


I’d like . . .


 Vocabulary : a bowl of noodle


<b>III. Techniques:</b> pair work ; chatting,guessing.


<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>: pictures ; cassette, flash card



<b>V.Procedures:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

<b>A.Warm up: </b>


Ss: Play it in teams, taking it in turns
to fill up the lists on the board


<b> B.Presentation</b>


- Play the tape and let Ss listen ,
then number the pictures as they
hear.


Ss : - Repeat after teacher .


- Play the role in the dialogue
- Present some structures


Ss: Listen , remember & learn these
structures by heart


<b>-</b> Give other examples


- Ask Ss some questions “What
would you like for breakfast? . . ,.
Ss: Listen to the teacher, then try to
answer.


- let Ss answer, beginning with “ I’d


like . . .”


<b>C.Practice</b>


- Have Ss practice in pairs


- Call some pairs and have them
practice before the class


- Correct the mistakes if there are.
- Have them to do exercises in the
workbook on page 91,92


<b> </b>


<i><b>* Kim’s game (B1 )</b></i>


<i><b>Note: </b></i>a bowl of noodle (pict.)


<i><b>There’s a . . . There’s some</b></i>


<i><b>. . .</b></i> <i><b>There are </b><b>some . . .</b></i>


<i>- can of soda -rice</i>


<i>- </i> <i>- vegetables</i>


<i><b>-B4. Listen</b></i>


<i><b>* Matching </b>(B4 – P.120 )</i>



<i><b>a b c d e f</b></i> <i><b>g h i</b></i> <i><b>j</b></i> <i><b>k l</b></i>


<i><b>2 4</b></i> <i><b>1 5</b></i> <i><b>7 3 6</b></i> <i><b>8</b></i>


<i><b>Tape transcript</b></i>


<i> fish </i>
<i> noodles</i>
<i> orange juice</i>
<i> beef</i>


<i> vegetables</i>
<i> milk</i>
<i> bananas</i>
<i> water</i>


<i><b>B3 Ask and answer</b></i>


* Model:


What would you like for breakfast?
lunch?


<i><b> </b></i> dinner?


I’d like . . .


<i><b>* Word cue drill</b></i>



- bread / milk
- noodle / water
- rice / orange juice
- fish / soda


- chicken / iced tea


- beef / vegetables / lemonade
Example exchanges:


S1: What would you like for breakfast?
S2: I’d like some [beef] and some [milk]


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

<i><b></b></i>


<b> </b>


<b>D.Production</b>


- Have Ss make sentences
- Correct the mistakes


S1: : What would you like for lunch?
S2: I’d like some [fish] and a[soda]


* Note: Use a/an for an orange juice , a soda,
an iced tea, a lemonade even though”some” is
also correct. By using a/an we mean “ a glass
of . . .” or, “ a can of . . .” or, “ a cup of . . .”
but we just don’t say it



<i><b>* Chain game </b></i>


S1: I’d like some fish


S2: I’d like some fish and some rice


S3: I’d like some fish, some rice and a coke.
. . .


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn by heart all the new words & structures


- Practice reading the dialouge.
- Prepare next part B2,5,6


<i>Date of pre : 08/02/2011 Week : 24</i>
<i>Date of tea : 09/02/2011</i>


<i> Period : 69</i>


<b>UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5: Section B</b>: </i><b>AT THE CANTEEN</b> (B 2,5,6)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about prices
for food and drink with “ How much . . . ?”


<b>II. Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : How much is . . .?



It’s . . .


 Vocabulary : hundred , thousand


<b>III. Techniques:</b> pair work ; chatting,guessing.


<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>: pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V.Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

Ss: Choose 4 out of the 12 words
T: read “ a can of soda , a bottle of
water, some bananas, some rice, a
glass of orange juice, some meat,
some orange, a bowl of noodles,
some fish,some milk, some
vegetables, some chicken


<b> B.Presentation</b>


-Introduce the situation of the
dialogue


- Introduce some new words


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
carefully, then redo by their own


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs.
Ss : - Repeat after teacher .


- Play the role in the dialogue
- Present some structures


Ss: Listen , remember & learn these
structures by heart


<b>-</b> Give other examples
<b>C.Practice</b>


- Have Ss practice in pairs


- Call some pairs and have them
practice before the class


- Correct the mistakes if there are


<b> </b>


<b>-</b>Have Ss play this game in 2 groups


- Set the scene: Lan goes to the
canteen with her friends. They don’t
know what the prices of food is, the
salegirl give them a menu.


(B1 –P.119& B4- P.120)



<i><b>B2. Listen & repeat. Thenpractice the dialogue</b></i>
<i><b>with a partner</b></i>


1. Pre –teach
- hundred
- thousand
- a cake (realia)
- a sandwich (realia)
- a fried rice (pict.)
- an ice-cream (pict.)
- a bowl of . . . (pic.)
2. Model sentences


<i><b> </b>How much<b> are they</b>( a sandwich and a glass of</i>
<i>lemon juice)<b>?</b></i>


<i><b>- (</b>They are<b> ) two thousand five hundred dong.</b></i>
<i><b> </b>How much<b> is it </b>( an iced – cream)<b> ?</b></i>


<i><b>- </b>( It is <b>) 2 thousand dong</b></i>


3. Blackboard drill


100 50 200
150 350 750


1000 2000 5000 10000
7500 9500 2300 4200
4. Noughts and cross



S1: How much is it?


S2: It’s two thousand five hundred dong
2500 d 500 d 3000 d
4800 d 10000 d 1000 d
1200 d 8500 d 5000 d


<i><b>B5. Listen & read. Thenpractice the dialogue </b></i>
<i><b>with a partner</b></i>


<i><b>* Answer given</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

<i><b></b></i>


--- Introduce the price of food
Ss: Listen and repeat


- Resay the way to use “ How much
…?”


- Have Ss practice in pairs
- Correct the mistakes


<b> D.Production</b>


- Have Ss fill in the survey
according to the real prices they
know, not the prices in the text book
- Correct the mistakes



2500 3000 1500 500 1800 1000 2000
Ex: How much is a fried rice ?


<i><b>* Picture drill</b> (B5-6/P.121)</i>


Ex: S1: How much is a fried rice ?


S2: It’s two thousand five hundred dong


* Survey
H
ow
m
uc
h
is
it
?
a
fr
ie
d
ric
e
a
bo
w
l o
f n
oo


dl
e
A
c
an
o
f c
ok
e
A
n
er
as
er
A
ru
le
r
A
s
ch
oo
l b
ag
Ti
en
g
A
nh
6

A
b
ot
tle
o
f w
at
er
A
p
en
ci
l


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn by heart all the new words & structures


- Practice reading the dialouge.
- Prepare grammar practice


<i>Date of pre : 14/02/2011 </i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 25</i>
<i>Date of tea : 15/02/2011 </i>


<i> Period : 70</i>


<b>UNIT 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT?</b>
<i><b>GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b></i>


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice in
likes and dislikes (Simple present tense), countability, Adjectives, Question words,
Present progressive, simple present, quantifiers



<b>II. Language contents:</b>
 Grammar : review
 Vocabulary : review


<b>III. Techniques:</b> pair work ; chatting,guessing.


<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>: pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V.Procedures:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

<b>A.Warm up: </b>


- Guide Ss to play the game
Ss: Do as directed


<b> B.Activity 1</b>


- Let Ss do the exercise orally first
then write in the exercise notebooks
<b>C.Activity 2</b>


- Remind the way to use a , an , any,
some.


Ss: Listen and remember
- Have Ss practice in pairs


- Call some pairs and have them
practice before the class



- Correct the mistakes if there are


<b> D.Activity 3</b>


<b>-</b>Have Ss play this game in 2 groups
- Have Ss do the exercise in groups
- Correct the mistakes


<b> E.Activity 4</b>


- Remind the way to use “ WH –
questions”


- Have Ss do exercise in groups
- Correct the mistakes


<i><b>* Find some one who .</b></i> .


( Simple present tense)


Find some one who . . . Name
. . . likes fish.


. . .doesn’t like chicken.
. . . likes bread


. . . doesn’t like rice.
. . . likes milk .



. . .doesn’t like soda.


. . . doesn’t like vegetables


<i><b>1. Grammar practice 1 (like /dislike)</b></i>


a. like , like ; Do…like , I don’t like


b. does …like , likes ; Does … like , doesn’t like


<i><b>2. Grammar practice 2(a,an,some,any)</b></i>


* Network


a an some


a sandwich
a banana
. . .


an orange
an icecream
. . .


some noodles
some fish
. . .


* Practice



a. any , any , some , an
b. any , some


c. any , some , a


<i><b>3. Adjectives</b></i>


* Pelmanism


tall ,short, long,short,hot,cold,fat, thin,
heavy,light, weak,strong


* Practice


a. short b. thin
c. light d. strong
e. full f. cold
g. thin h. long


<i><b>4. Question words</b></i>


a. Who b. What
c. How d. What
e. Where


<i><b>5. Contrast</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<i><b></b></i>


--- Do the same methods above



<b> </b>


<b> D.Production</b>


- Have Ss play the game
Ss: Do as directed


a. is eating b. are drinking
c. is riding d. is going
e. is getting f. is traveling
* <b>Lucky numbers</b>


1. What does cooking oil come in? a bottle
2, What does tea come in? a packet
3. What does soap come in? a bar
4 ,6,11 are lucky numbers


5. What does soda come in? a can
7. What does iced tea come in? a glass
8. What do chocolates come in? a box
9. What do noodles come in? a bowl
10. What does water come in? a bottle/glass
12. What does toothpaste come in? a tube


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn by heart all the new words & structures


- Prepare for checking 1 period


<i>Date of pre : 15/02/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 25</i>


<i>Date of tea : 16/02/2011 Period : 71</i>


<b>TEST ONE PERIOD</b>


I<b>/ Objectives</b>: By the end of the lesson, teacher will be able to check students’
knowledge form Unit 9 to Unit 11


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : Countability, Adjectives, Question words, Present progressive,
simple present, quantifiers


<sub></sub> Vocabulary :


<b>III. Techniques :</b>


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : Test


<b>V/ Procedures</b><i> :</i>


<i><b>I. Sắp xếp các câu sau thành đoạn hội thoại hợp lý (3 marks )</b></i>


- Thanks. How much are they? Ex : Can I help you ?


- Can I help you? ………


- How many oranges do you want? ………….………..


- I’d like some oranges. ………



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

- Here you are. ………
- Ten thousand dong . . . Thank you . ………
<i><b>II. Chọn từ đúng trong ngoặc ( 2 marks )</b></i>


1- She ………….. some vegetables. (want/ don’t want / wants )
2- We don’t want ………. oil . ( some / any / a )


3- How …………. kilos of meat does she want ? ( much / many / about )
4- Her sister doesn’t want ……… coffee . ( some / any / a )


5- ……… rice does his father want ? ( How much / How / How many )
6- My mother ……….the meals everyday. ( cooks / cooking / cook )
7- They need …………. soda ( a/ some / any )


8- How ……… are these eggs ? ( many / much / a )


<i><b>III. Sắp xếp các từ dưới đây thành câu hoàn chỉnh ( 2 marks )</b></i>
1- some / want / milk / the students. ………
2- like / you / do / noodles ? ………
3- orange juice / she / how much / does / want ? ………
4- would / what / breakfast / like / Lan /for ? ………


<i><b>IV- Chọn từ có phần gạch dưới phát âm khác với các từ khác ( 1 mark )</b></i>


1. there near engineer here


2. black garden half bananas


<b>V- </b>



<b> </b><i><b>Đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời câu hỏi (</b><b> 2 marks</b></i><b> ) </b>


Miss Van has an oval face and round eyes. Her lips are full. She has long
black hair and a small nose. Her favorite food is fish , and she likes orange juice
best .


<i><b>Questions:</b></i>


1. Does she have a round face or an oval face? ………
2. What color is her hair? …….………
3. What is her favorite food? …….………
4. What does she like to drink? …….………


<b>END</b>


<i>Date of pre :15/02/2011 Week : 25</i>


<i>Date of tea :16/02/2011 </i> <i> Period : 72</i>


<b>TEST CORRECTION</b>


<i><b>I.Sắp xếp các câu sau thành đoạn hội thoại hợp lý (3 marks )</b></i>
<i><b> Ex : Can I help you ? </b></i>


- I’d like some oranges.


- How many oranges do you want?
- Half a dozen, please.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>--- Here you are. </b></i>


- Thanks. How much are they?
- Ten thousand dong . . . Thank you
<i><b>II.Chọn từ đúng trong ngoặc ( 2 marks </b></i>


<i><b> 1- wants </b></i> 2- any 3- many 4- any


5- How much 6- cooks 7- a 8- much


<i><b>III. Sắp xếp các từ dưới đây thành câu hoàn chỉnh ( 2 marks )</b></i>


1. The students want some milk. 2. Do you like any doodles?


3. How much orange juice does she want? 4. What would Lan like for breakfast?
<i><b>IV Chọn từ có phần gạch dưới phát âm khác với các từ khác ( 1 mark )</b></i>


1. there 2.black


<b>V- </b>


<b> </b><i><b>Chọn từ có phần gạch dưới phát âm khác với các từ khác ( 1 mark</b> )</i><b> </b>


1. She has an oval face
2. It’s black


3. Her favorite food is fish
4. She likes orange juice .


<i><b> END</b></i>



<i>Date of pre : 22/02/2011 Week : 26</i>
<i>Date of tea : 23/02/2011 Period : 73+74</i>


<b>UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES</b>


<i>Lesson 1- Section A : </i><b>WHAT ARE THEY DOING</b>? (A 1- 6)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice in
present progressive and sports vocabulary to talk about what people are doing now.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : - Simple present


- Present progressive


 Vocabulary : badminton , soccer,volleyball, skipping , . . .


<i><b>III. Techniques :</b></i> pair work ; guessing, communicative approach.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. </b></i>Procedures :


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b> A. Warm up</b>


- Have Ss play this game to remember
some words<b> </b>



<b> B.Presentation</b>


<i><b>* Jumbled words</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

- Introduces new words by using the
pictures


- Read the new words.


- Play the tape again and let sts repeat
Ss : - Repeat after teacher .


<b>-</b> Listen and copy down.


<b>-</b> Repeat (chorus) then work in pairs.
- Must be 2 people or more vs. can be
one person


T reads: play football, jog,play tennis,
play table tenis, do aerobics, skip,
swim , play volleyball


<b>C.Practice</b>


- Remin the present progressive tense
- Ask Ss to give some example


- Point the picture then ask and
answer.



- Let Ss practice in pairs


- Ask Ss to repeat the words indicating
sports activities.


-Stick pictures ofA3/125 on the board.
-Ss practice asking and answering in
pairs


- Introduce the two characters Lan and
Nam, ask them to read the text about
Lan & Nam.


Ss:Listen, then read the text carefully.
- Ask Ss to read then answer the
questions below.


- Check whether their answers are
right or wrong.


<b> D.Consolidation</b>


<i><b>A1 : Listen and read </b></i>


1. Pre – teach
- (to)swim (pict.)


- ( to) play badminton (pict.)
- (to)jog (pict.)



- (to) do aerobics (pict.)
- (to)play table tennis (pict.)
- (to) skip (pict.)


* Check Vo: Slap the board
2. Dictation lists


* Answer keys


2 people + 1 person
play football


play tennis
play table tenis
play volleyball


jog


do aerobics
skip


swim


<i><b>A2 : Ask and answer</b></i>
<i><b>* Model sentences</b></i>


What <i>is</i> he doing<i><b> ? </b></i>He <i>is<b> swimming </b></i>


= > The present continues<i><b>:</b></i>



<i><b>What + is / am /are +S + doing ?</b></i>
<i><b>S + is /am / are + V – ing</b></i>


<i><b>A3. Listen and repeat</b></i>
<i><b>* Picture drill</b></i>


Ex: S1: Which sports do you do?
S2: I [ play soccer ] and I [ swim]


<i><b>A4. Read. Then answer the questions.</b></i>


a. She swims, she does aerobics and she
play badminton.


b. No, she doesn’t.


c. He plays soccer, he jogs and he plays
table tennis.


d. Yes, he does.


<i><b>5. Write</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

<i><b></b></i>


---Ask a student to practice with their
partner.


- Have them tell about themselves and


talk to their friends about their
favorite sports.


- Check the answers and correct if
there is any mistake.


- Retell how to ask questions with
interrogative words “ Which & What”
- Have them write the notes in their
notebooks and learn by heart.


- Resay all the stuctures again.


<i><b>* Free talk</b></i>


- Which sports do you play?


Which sport / What (sport) do you play ?
- I play . . .


What is he / she doing ?
- He / She is . . .


<i><b>6. Remember</b></i>


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn new words and structures by heart.


- Prepare next part B 1 – 3


- Do exercises in workbook from page 101 to 102


<i>Date of pre : 23/02/2011 Week : 26</i>
<i>Date of tea : 24/02/2011 Period : 75</i>


<b>UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES</b>


<i>Lesson 2- Section B : <b>FREE TIME</b></i> ( B1-3)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write short texts
about what we do in our free time.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : - What do you do in your free time ?


- What does he / she do in his / her free time?
- How often do you play sports ?. . .


 Vocabulary : movie , theater , (go) fishing, . . .


<i><b>III. Techniques :</b></i> pair work ; guessing, communicative approach.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. </b></i>Procedures :


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b> A. Warm up</b>


- Have Ss play this game to remember
some words<b> </b>



<b> </b>


<i><b>* Guessing game</b></i>


I . . . . .in my free time.
Example:


I do aerobics in my free time


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

<b> B.Pre- writing</b>


- Introduces new words by using the
pictures


- Read the new words.
Ss : - Repeat after teacher .


<b>-</b> Listen and copy down.


<b>-</b> Repeat (chorus) then work in pairs.
- Play the tape and let Ss repeat
( look at the pictures)


- Replain the sentences from a – f.
Retell what the characters in section 1
do in their free time


- Emphasize the third person singular
and the agreement of the verbs



- Have Ss change “I” to “Phuong . . .”
by asking some questions like
example


- Have Ss write in their notebooks.
- Ss : Correct their own writing with
answer key (B3 / 128 )


- Let Ss listen and read the sentences
in B3 again.


<b>C.While - writing</b>


Ss: Write 3 things what they do in
their free time.


- In groups, they put all their
sentences together on a poster


S2: No, I don’t


S3: Do you watch TV?
S2: No’ I don’t.


. . .


<i><b>B1. Listen and repeat</b></i>


1. Vocabulary



- <i><b>free-time (trans.)</b></i>


<i><b>- (to)go fishing (pict.)</b></i>
<i><b>- (to) to the movies (pict.)</b></i>


1. Picture drill ( transformation)
(B1 / P. 127)


Example :


S1: What does (Phuong) do in his free
time?


S2 : He goes to the movies
3. Transform Writing


* Answer key : <i><b>B3 / 128 – Listen and read</b></i>


a. Phuong goes to the movies in his dree
time.


b. Ly . . .
. . .
4. Pyramid
Example:


Individual writing


Lan writes: I watch TV, I go to the park and


I play badminton.


Huy writes: I watch TV, I go fishing and I
play soccer.


Thinh writes: I listen to music , I play
soccer and I watch TV.


Group writing.


Lan, Huy ,Thinh watch TV.
Huy and Thinh play football


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

<i><b></b></i>


<b> D. Post - writing</b>


-Ask the students to work in pairs and
let them practice before the class.
- Remark and correct the mistakes.


Huy goes fishing.


Lan goes to the park and I plays
badminton.


Thinh listens to music
* Free – talk: <i><b>( B2 )</b></i>


<i><b>What do you do in your free time?</b></i>



<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn new words and structures by heart.


- Prepare next part B 4 - 5


<i>Date of pre : 01/03/2011 Week : 27</i>
<i>Date of tea : 02/03/2011 Period : 76</i>


<b>UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES</b>


<i>Lesson 3- Section B : <b>FREE TIME</b></i> ( B4-6)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to use “
How often . . .?” questions and answers “ once / twice / three times . . . a week ” to
talk about frequency of activities.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : - How often does he / she go jogging ?


He / She goes jogging once a week.
- How often do you play sports ?
I play sports twice a week.


 Vocabulary : how often , once ,twice, . . .


<i><b>III. Techniques :</b></i> pair work ; guessing, communicative approach.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.



<i><b>V. </b></i>Procedures :


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b> A. Warm up</b>


- Explain the aims & the requirement
of the exercise.


- Stick 6 pictures of B4 on the board
- Have Ss <b>listen to the cassette and </b>


<i><b>B4. Listen</b></i>
<i><b>* Matching</b></i>


- Tan : f


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

<b>match the names with the letters of </b>
<b>the pictures.</b>


<b>Ss: Listen to the cassette and do </b>
<b>exercise. </b>


<b>- Divide the class into 2 groups</b>


- Let Ss play game “matching”
- Let Ss listen to the tape again &
check the answer.


<b> B.Presentation</b>



- Set up new situations to introduce
the adverbs of frequency


- Explain how to use these adverbs
and give examples


Ss : Notice the usage of advebs of
frequency


- Let Ss listen to the dialogue


- Ask some questions and let Ss anwer
to check their comprehension.




<b>C.Practice</b>


- Use the charts describing Ly’s diary
to introduce her activities.


- Have Ss practice in pair , asking and
answering according to the model
given.


- Call some Ss and check their
answers.


- Lan and Mai : b
* <i>Tape transcript</i>


<i>Tan reads</i>


<i>Minh and Nam play video game.</i>
<i>Lien watches TV.</i>


<i>Lan and Mai listen to music.</i>


<i><b>B5. Listen and read</b></i>


1. Vocabulary
- How often (trans.)
- once(trans.)


- twice(trans.)


- three times (trans.)
2. Matching


once a week
twice a week


three times a week


M T W T F S S




<b>Ï</b>





  




* Model sentences.


<i><b> How often does she goes jogging?</b></i>
<i><b> listen to music.?</b></i>
<i><b> read?</b></i>


<i><b>She goes jogging once </b></i>


<i><b> listens to music twice a week.</b></i>
<i><b> reads three times</b></i>


3. Substitution drill


Cues: three,one,four, two, one,five ,two,
six, one, three, seven, one


Ex : T says Ss say:


Three  three times a week


One  once a week


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

<i><b></b></i>
<b> D. Production</b>



-Ask students to work in groups to
play this game by asking:


S1: How often do you play soccer?
S2: Once a week.


4. Picture drill (A5- 129)


S1: How often does Ly [ go to school]?
S2: She goes [six times] a week.


* Find some one who . . .


Find some one who . . Nam
e
. . .plays soccer twice a week


. . .goes to the park once a week.
. . .watches TV seven times a
week.


. . .plays badminton twice a week.
. . .does homework six times a
week.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn new words and structures by heart.


- Prepare next part C1-4


<i>Date of pre : 01/03/2011 Week : 27</i>


<i>Date of tea : 02/03/2011 Period : 77</i>


<b>UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES</b>


<i>Lesson 4- Section C : <b>HOW OFTEN?</b></i> ( C1-4)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a picture story
to understand the details and practice adverbs of frequency (always, usually,
often,sometimes, never ) with the simple present tense for regular activities.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : - Present simple


- Adverbs of frequency


 Vocabulary : always, usually, sometimes, never


<i><b>III. Techniques :</b></i> pair work ; guessing, communicative approach.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. </b></i>Procedures :


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b> A. Warm up</b>


- Let Ss play the game
Ss : Do as directed



<i><b>* Noughts and crosses</b></i>


swim read a book play tennis
play football do


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

<b> B.Pre-reading</b>


- Say the adverbs of frequency loudly.
- Explain the meanings of these
adverbs , then let Ss listen and repeat
Ss: Listen to the teacher, notice the
meanings of the adverbs of frequency.


<b>C. While- reading</b>


- Introduce Ba and Lan’s activities
- Tell them what Ba and Lan do.


- Have Ss use the pictures and read
the text to match the Vietnamese
meaning with the new vocabulary in
the context


Ss: do as the teacher says


-Let Ss listen to the cassette and then
retell Ss about their activities


- Explain the whole text



Ss:- listen and then pay attention to
the teacher’s explanation.


- Read the text again


- Let Ss practice in pairs, ask and
answer the question about Ba and
Lan’s activities.Use “How often . . .?”


- Hang the poster on the board.


- Have Ss work in group of a table to
find the answer of the questions.


- Have them practice asking and
answering


- Correct the mistakes


volleyball


<i><b>1. Pre-teach (C1 / P.130)</b></i>
<i><b>- always</b></i>


<i><b>- usually</b></i>
<i><b>- often</b></i>
<i><b>- sometimes</b></i>
<i><b>- never</b></i>


* Check Vo: W & W





<i><b>C2 : Listen and read</b></i>


a. Guess the meaning
- tha dieu


- cai leu
- di cam trai
- di da ngoai


b. Grid ( <b> C3 / P. 131)</b>


* Answer key
How often do they


<b>ne</b>
<b>ve</b>
<b>r</b>
<b>so</b>
<b>m</b>
<b>et</b>
<b>im</b>
<b>es</b>
<b>of</b>
<b>te</b>
<b>n</b>
<b>us</b>
<b>ua</b>


<b>lly</b>
<b>al</b>
<b>w</b>
<b>ay</b>
<b>s</b>


. . . go to the zoo?
. . . go to the park?
. . . have a picnic?
. . . do sports?
. . . fly kites?
. . . go camping?
. . .walk to school?
. . . do homework?
c. Given answer


a. About 3 times a year.
b. Twice a week.


c. No, never


LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011


  


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

<i><b></b></i>


<b> D. Post-reading</b>


-Ask questions about their own


activities and let them answer.


- Let Ss practice in pairs , do as the
model given


- Ask them to copy the text then write
question and answers in their exercise
book


d. Yes, always
* Answer key:


a. How often do they go to the zoo?
b. How often do they go to the park?
c. Do they go camping?


Are they late for school?
d. Do they walk to school?
Do they do their home work?


<i><b>C4. Write sentences about you in your </b></i>
<i><b>exercise book.</b></i>


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn new words and structures by heart.


- Prepare next part C5-7


<i>Date of pre : 02/03/2011 Week : 27</i>
<i>Date of tea : 03/03/2011 Period : 78</i>



<b>UNIT 12 : SPORTS AND PASTIMES</b>


<i>Lesson 5- Section C : <b>HOW OFTEN?</b></i> ( C5-7)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a text to
understand the details and get further practice adverbs of frequency ,the simple
present tense and outdoor pastimes vocabulary.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : - Present simple


- Adverbs of frequency


 Vocabulary : wear, clothes, boots, a stove, overnight


<i><b>III. Techniques :</b></i> pair work ; guessing, communicative approach.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. </b></i>Procedures :


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>A. Warm up</b>


- Let Ss predict how often Nga and
Lan do the things


- Ask them listen and correct their
predictions.



<i><b>C5. Listen</b></i>


* Predict


a. b. c. d. e.
* Answer key


a. never b. sometimes


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

<b> B.Pre-reading</b>


- Write the subject on the board
- Divide the class into 2 teams
- let Ss play the game


- Present some new words by using
realia& pictures


- Read them aloud


Ss: Listen, copy , repeat then read
individually




<b>C. While- reading</b>


- Have Ss work in groups to answer
the questions.(write in the sub-board)


- Stick the sub-board on the board
- Correct the mistakes


- Let Ss practice in pairs( asking and
answering)


<b> D. Post-reading</b>


- Ask Ss to write a short paragraph
from the text (C6 / p.132)


Note: - For weaker students : Change
“Minh” to “I”


- For stronger students: Change
“Minh” to “I” and use “Network””


* Tape transcript


<i>Nga and Lan never go camping</i>
<i>They sometimes go to the zoo.</i>
<i>They often go to the park.</i>
<i>They often play sports.</i>


<i>They usually have a picnic in the park.</i>


<i><b>* Network</b></i>


<i> </i>



<i>fly a kite</i>


* Pre-teach


<i><b>- wear (pict.)</b></i>
<i><b>- clothes ( realia)</b></i>
<i><b>- boots ( realia)</b></i>
<i><b>- a stove (pict.)</b></i>
<i><b>- overnight (trans.)</b></i>


* Check Vo: R & R


<i><b>C6. Comprehension questions</b></i>


Answer keys


a.He likes walking.


b. They always wears strong boots and
warm clothes.


c. He goes on the weekend.


d. He usually goes with two friends.


e. He often goes walking in the mountain.
f. They take food, water and a camping
stove.


* Transformation writing



Ex: - I like walking. On the weekend I
often go walking in the mountains. I usually
go with 2 friends. Me and my friends


always wear strong boots and warm
clothes . . .


LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

<i><b></b></i>


- I like . . . On the weekend I often . . . . I
usually . . . Me and my friends always wear
. . . and I always take. . . Sometimes we . . .


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- Learn new words and structures by heart.


- Prepare next part A1,2


<i>Date of pre : 07/03/2011 Week : 28</i>
<i>Date of tea : 09/03/2011 Period : 79</i>


<b>UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND SEASONS</b>


<i>Lesson 1- Section A : </i><b>THE WEATHER AND SEASONS </b>(A 1-2)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about


temperature and the weather, seasonvocabulary with “w hat’s the weather like...?”



<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : - What’s the weather like in the spring?


- It’s warm in the spring


 Vocabulary : warm, cool, the summer, the spring, the autunm, the winter
<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; guessing, communicative approach.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. </b></i>Procedures :


<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up :</b>


-Guide Ss to play the game.


<b>B.Presentation</b>


- Use some method to introduce
new words.


<i><b>* Guessing game</b></i>


Ex: I am hot


S1: Are you tired ?


S2: No, I am not
S3: Are you hot?
S2: Yes, I am


<i><b>1.Pre-teach</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

Ss: do as directed.


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down – repeat
- Guide Ss to do the exercise.
- Call on 2 Ss to go to the board
and match


-Give feedback


-Present the sentences on page
135.


- Read - Ss repeat.
-Ss read individually.


-Introduce the model sentence:
-Ss listen and copy.



<b>C.Practice:</b>


-Have Ss look at the pictures of
A1 on page 134, then practice
asking and answering


<b> D.Production: </b>


-Guide Ss to play the game
-Divide the class into two teams.
- Hang a box with the words on
the board


-Ss: use the words in the box to
build the sentences as they could.
-Ss : work in groups (one for each
season)


-Each group makes a poster.


-cool (adj) (pict)
-the summer (expl)
-the winter (expl/ pict)


--the autumn = fall (expl/pict)
-the spring (expl/pict)


<i>*Checking: R&R</i>
2.Matching


1.cold
2.warm
3.cool
4.hot
a.spring
b.summer
c.fall
d.winter


A.June, July. August.
B.September, October,
November


C.December, January,
February


D.March, April, May


Ex: 1-d-B


<b>3.Presentation statements</b>:


<b>*Model sentences:</b> <i><b>H</b><b>ỏ</b><b>i vaø tr</b><b>ả</b><b> l</b><b>ờ</b><b>i v</b><b>ề</b><b> th</b><b>ờ</b><b>i ti</b><b>ế</b><b>t</b></i>


<b> What’ the weather like in the winter?</b>
<b> It’s cold.</b>


<i><b>* Picture Drill</b></i>


S1: What’s the weather like in the fall?


S2: It’s warm


<b>* </b>Noughts and crosses


fall hot winter


summer cold warm


cool spring weather


S1:what’s the weather like today /in the fall?
S2: It’s cool.


<b>* </b>.Substitution Boxes


rice hot and mountain
green river the night
morning warm yellow


beautifull cold evening cool trees hot
flowers fall blue afternoon very


Ex: In the fall:


The morning is cool.
The weather is cool.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>---* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: - Learn vocabulary and structures by heart.



- Prepare A 3.


<i>Date of pre : 08/03/2011 Week : 28</i>
<i>Date of tea : 09/03/2011 Period : 80</i>


<b>UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND SEASONS</b>


<i>Lesson 2- Section A : </i><b>THE WEATHER AND SEASONS </b>(A3)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the question
“What weather do you like?” to talk about your favorite weather and contrast it
with “What’s the weather like?”


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : : - What weather do you like? I like hot weather.


-What weather does she like? She likes cool weather.


 Vocabulary : review


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; wordsquare.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. </b></i>Procedures :


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



<b>A.Warm up : </b>


-Have Ss look at the table and
find out the words,


-Ss: play in two teams.
-Give feedback


<i><b>* Wordsquare</b></i>


F A L L C O L D


X W A R M N S S


G N I R P S U E


O N L N I O M A


T H S I T S M S


C O O L K E E O


W E A T H E R N


spring hot, winter, like


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

<b>B.Presentation</b>


- Set the scene: <i>How do you feel </i>
<i>when it’s cool?</i> (Ss answer)


-Ss: look at the their books, then
listen and repeat after the teacher
-Ss : read individually.


- Introduce the model sentences
-Ss : listen and copy


<b>C.Practice:</b>


-Let Ss look at the pictures, then
practice asking and answering in
pairs


<b> D.Further Practice:</b>


-Get Ss to prctice asking and
answering by replacing


information on mapped dialouge


<i><b>*Model sentences:</b></i>


-What weather do you like?
I like hot weather.


-What weather does she like?
She likes cool weather.


<i><b>* Picture drill</b></i>



S1: What weather do you like?
S2: I’d likecool weather<b>.</b>


 <i><b>Mapped dialouge</b></i>


... Ha Noi?
... hot


... cold
... like?
. . . Nha Trang


... cold
. ... Nha trang?
... like?
. . . Ha Noi
... hot....


S1: What’s the weather like in Ha Noi?
S2: It’s cold.


What’s the weather like in Nha Trang?
S1: It’s hot


S2: What weather do you like?
S1: I like cold weather.


S2: Come to Ha Noi


S1: What weather do you like?


S2: I like hot weather


S1: Come to Nha Trang


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: - Write the dialouge into their exercise books


- Learn structures and vocabulary by heart.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

<i><b></b></i>


- Prepare next part:A 4-5.


<i>Date of pre : 09/03/2011 Week : 28</i>
<i>Date of tea : 10/03/2011 Period : 81</i>


<b>UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND SEASONS</b>


<i>Lesson 3- Section A : </i><b>THE WEATHER AND SEASONS </b>(A 4-5)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “when”
clauses in positive statements and “Wh – questions”.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : : - What does Ba do when it’s hot?


When it’s hot ,Ba goes swimming.
- What do you do when it’s cold?
When it’s cold, I play soccer.



 Vocabulary : review


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, communicative approach.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. Procedures :</b></i>


<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up:</b>


- Let Ss tell the pastimes in their
free time.


- Whole class.


<b> </b>


<b> B.Pre-reading</b>


-Have Ss guess what Ba does when
it’s


(hot)


<i><b>*Network</b></i>


*<i>Possible answer</i>;



+ go fishing + go for a walk
+ go camping + go jogging
+ listen to music + watch Tv
+ read books + fly kites
...


<i><b>* Prediction</b></i>:


What does Ba do when it’s ...?


b. hot ...


c. cold ...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

- Give feedback.
<b>C.While – reading</b>


- Get Ss to read the text and check
their prediction


- Read the text - Ss: listen and
repeat.


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


Ss : listen and repeat
- Explain about the model


sentences.


Ss : listen and copy down


- Hang the poster with the
phrasewords on the board


-Ss : practice asking and answering
by using the cue.


<b>D.Post-reading:</b>


-Ask Ss to change the text about Ba
and write about themselves, using
“I”


-Ss: read their partner’s text and
write about their partner using “He /
She”


- Give feed back and corect the
mistakes.


d. warm ...


e. cool ...


<i><b>1.Checking their prediction.</b></i>


<i><b>2.Model sentences</b></i>:



What does he do when it’s hot?


do you


When it’s hot he goes fishing?


I go


<i><b>3.Practice: * Word cue drill</b></i>


a. cold / go jogging?
b. cool / do aerobics?
c. hot / go swimming?
d. warm / go to the park/


S1: What do you do when it’s cold?
S2: When it’s cold , I go jogging.


<i><b>* Transformation writing:</b></i>


Ex: When it’s hot, I ...
When...


Ex: When it’s hot, he/she ...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>---* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: - Write 2 texts into your exercise books.



- Learn structutres by heart
- Prepair next part B1,2


<i>Date of pre :15/03/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 29</i>
<i>Date of tea : 16/03/2011</i>


<i> Period : 82</i>


<b>UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND SEASONS</b>


<i>Lesson 4- Section B : </i><b>ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS </b>(B 1)


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to do further practice
in adverbs of frequency, simple present, sports vocabulary and seasons.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


 Grammar : : We often play volleyball in the spring.


He never goes swimming in the winter.


 Vocabulary : play basketball, go sailing
<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, matching


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. </b></i>Procedures :


<b>Teacher and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>



<b>A. Warm up : </b>


-Call on some Ss to go to the board
and match


-Give aswer key


<b> B. Presentation:</b>


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down – repeat
-Ss look at their books while
listening .


- Read these sentences .
Ss : repeat


<i><b>* Matching</b></i>:


Always
Usually
Often
Sometimes
Never















<i><b>1.Pre-teach : </b></i>


- (to) play basketball (pict)
-to sail = go sailing (pict)


*Checking: Slap the board


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

-Ss read individually.
<b>C.Practice</b> :<b> </b>


-Hang the some answers on the
board.


-Let Ss make the questions for the
answer.(work in pairs)


-T can do the first sentence.


- Call some pairs to demomstrate in
front of the class.



-Ss can use the pictures of b1 as
cues.


- Correct and give the answer key.
Ss : do as directed


<b>D.Consolidation</b>


-Guide Ss to play the games
-Divide the class into two teams
(Note : Ss can answer the questions
with what they really do ,Not what it
says in the book)


<i><b>* Answer given</b></i>


a.we often play volleyball.
b.They sometimes go sailling
c.I often go swimming.


d.She usually plays babminton.
e.We always play basketball.


<i><b>* Answer given</b></i>


a.What do they do in the spring?
b.What do they do in the Fall?
c.What do you do in the smmer?
d.What does she do in the fall?


e.What do you do in the winter?


<i><b>* : Lucky Nu</b></i>mbers


1 2 3* 4 5 6*


7 8 9* 10 11 12


1.What’s the weather like in the winter?
2.What do you usually eat in the Winter?
3.LN


4.What’s the weather like in the spring?
5.What do you usually do in the Fall?
6.LN


7.What do you usually do in the Summer?
8.What weather do you like?


9.LN


10.What’s the weather like in the Fall?
11.What sports do you play in the winter?
12. Do you often go fishing in the Fall?


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: - Write 3 things which you in each season.


- Practice reading the text.


- Prepare next part B2.



<i>Date of pre : 15/03/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 29</i>


<i>Date of tea : 16/03/2011</i>


<i> Period : 82</i>


<b>UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES AND SEASONS</b>


<i>Lesson 5- Section B : </i><b>ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS </b>(B 2,3)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

<i><b></b></i>
<b>---I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write about
activities they do in different seasons.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : : Which seasons do you like?
I like <i>the summer.</i>


 Vocabulary :


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, guessing


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. Procedures :</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>A.Warm up :</b>



- Call on 2 Ss to go to the board
and write the sentences


- Correct and give marks.
Ss: do as directed.


<b>B.Pre-writing</b>


-Let Ss tell the activities which
they often do in each season.
(whole class)


-Have Ss look at the map in the
brainstorming and practice asking
and answering.


-Ss: practice asking and answering
in pairs


- Get Ss to interview their partners
to complete the table.


-T can do first


-T can write the model sentences
on the board.


<i><b>* Checking up</b></i>



<i><b> Buiding sentences</b></i>


<b>a.I / often /swimming /summer</b>.
I often go swimming in the summer.


<b>b.He / sometimes / basketball / winter.</b>


He sometimes plays basketball in the winter.


<i><b>1.Brainstorming</b></i>


<i><b>2.Board drill.</b></i>


<i>S1: What do you do in the summer?</i>
<i>s2:I usually play in the park<b>.</b></i>


3.Survey
N
am
e
se
as
on
W
ea
th
er
U
su
al


ly
g
o
U
su
al
ly
d
o
U
su
al
ly
e
at
/
dr
in
k


usually usually


activities
&seasons


winter/spring summer/fall


sometimes



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

<b>C.While- writing</b>


-Let Ss write about their friends
they have just interviewed, using
the third person singular.


<b>D. Post-writing</b>


-Call on 2 Ss to go to the board and
write their the paragraphs.


- Correct the mistakes


L


an


F


al


l


co


ol


th


e



pa


rk <sub>jo</sub>g


fr


ui


t/


co


ld


dr


in


k


Example exchange:


S1:Which seasons do you like?
S2:fall


S1:What’s weather like in the fall?
S2: Ịt’s cool.


S1:Where do you usually go?


S2:To the park


S1:What do usually do there/
S2: I go camping with my friends.
S1:What do you usually eat or drink?
S2:We usually eat fruit and cold drink.


<i><b>4. Write it up</b></i>


<b>Ex:</b> Lan likes the fall. When the weather is cool,
she usually go camping in the park with her
friends. They usually eat fruit and drink cold
drink<b>.</b>


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: - Write about their own activities


- Prepare next part : Unit 14 : A 1-3


<i>Date of pre : 15/03/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 29</i>


<i>Date of tea : 16/03/2011</i>


<i> Period : 83</i>


<b>UNIT 14 : MAKING PLANS</b>


Lesson 1- Section A<b> : VACATION DESTINATION (A 1-3)</b>


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “going to”
Future, positive statements and “Wh-questions” to talk about vacation plans



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

<i><b></b></i>
<b>---II. Language contents :</b>


<sub></sub> Structutes : -What are you going to do ?_ I’m going to visit Hue.
-What’s she/he going to do?


she/he is going to visit Vung Tau.


 Vocabulary :the summer vacation, citadel, stay with, stay for....
<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, communicative approach.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. Procedures :</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Draw 5 circles and write a letter in
each circle. Have Ss match the
letters into the right words (Ss play
in teams )


Ss: do as directed.


<b>B. Presentation : </b>



- Read - Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat


-Readsthe dialogue of A1 aloud. Ss
listen without loooking their books
and number for the words.


- Give answer key


- Read the dialogue, Ss listen and
repeat sentence by sentence.
-Ss : role the play to read the
dialogue


-Ss : answer the questions in pairs.
-Ss : can give short answer because


<i><b>* Pattern Pulzze</b></i>



tea, toe, ear, are


<i><b>1.Pre-teach: Vocabulary : </b></i>


-a vacation = holiday


-the summer vacation (expl / trans)


- destination (n) (trans)


-to visit (trans)


-an aunt (trans) >< an uncle
-How long...? (trans)


-to stay with sb (trans)


-stay for ( a week/ a day) (trans)


<b>* Checking: Ordering vocabulary</b>


1.the summer vacation 2.visit
3.stay with sb 4.stay for a week
5.my aunt 6.my uncle


2.Presentation dialogue A1:


<b>*Comprehension question</b>


a.visit Hue


b.with her aunt and uncle.
c.one a week


d.visit the citadel


<i><b>*Model sentences:</b></i>



<b>-What are you going to do?</b>


E A R


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

they haven’t ‘going to ‘ yet.
- Explain the model sentences
-Ss: listen and copy.


<b> C.Practice: </b>


-Write the word cue drill on the
board


-Ss :practice asking and answering


- Get Ss to make the dialogues
by using the mapped dialogue.
-Ss practice in pairs.


Ss : do as directed


<b> D.Consolidation:</b>


-Introduce grammar.
-Ss: listen and copy


<b> I’m going to visit Hue.</b>
<b>-What’s she / he going to do?</b>
<b> She /He is gong to play soccer. </b>
<b>1.Word cue drill</b>



<i>-visit Hue -visit the zoo</i>
<i>-visit the citadel -camp in the park</i>
<i>stay in a hotel -stay in a tent</i>


<b>S1: What/Where are you going to do this </b>
<b>summer vacation?</b>


<b>S2: I’m going to visit Nha Trang</b>.


<b>2.Mapped dialogu</b>e


you Your friend
-What/ you/going/do/this


summer vacation?
-Where/you/going/stay?
-How long/you/going/
stay?


-What/you/going/do?


-visit Ha Long
-in a hotel
-for two weeks


-visit the beach ans swim
<b>* Grammar:</b>


<i><b> Immediate future</b></i>



<i>Form</i>:<b>S + be + going to + V....</b>


<i>Use</i>: dùùng diễn tả 1 dự đđịnh hay hành đñộng sắp
xảy ra trong tương lai.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>- L earn structures and vocabulary by haert.


- Complete the dialogue into their exercise books
- Prepare A 4,5 of unit 14


<i>Date of pre : 16/03/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 29</i>


<i>Date of tea : 17/03/2011</i>


<i>Period : 84</i>


<b>UNIT 14 : MAKING PLANS</b>


Lesson 2- Section A<b> : VACATION DESTINATION (A 4-5)</b>


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand a text
about vacation plans and practice with ‘going to’.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : “Be + going to + V...” future


-sequency words: first, then, next, after that, finally.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

<i><b></b></i>


<sub></sub> Vocabulary : beach, finally, go on vacation…


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, matching.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. Procedures</b></i>


<b>Teacher and sts’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b> A.Warm up :</b>


-Call on some Ss to go to the board
and match the phrase words in
column A with the right places in
column B.


- Give answer key.
<b>B. Pre-reading</b>


- Read and ask Ss to listen one time
Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat
- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat



Ss : do as directed


-Set the scene: Phuong and mai are
going to visit the five places you’ve
matched in the part of the warm
up.Where are they going to go first,
second, third, fourth, fifth.


Ss: dicuss the order they think.
-Give feedback


<b> C.While-reading</b>


-Have Ss read the text on page 142
and check their order.


- Give the answer key.
- Read the text, Ss repeat
-Ss: read individually


-Get Ss to fill the correct order in


<i><b>* Matching</b></i>


A B


Ben Thanh Market Nha Trang


The beach HCM city



The citadel Ha Noi


Ngoc Son temple Quang Ninh


Ha Long bay Hue


<b>1.Pre-teach: Vocabulary : </b>


-a beach (pict)


-finally (adv) (trans)


-to go on vacation = to go on holiday
*Checking :Slap the board


<b>2.Ordering </b> (with answer key)
First: Ha Long bay


Second: Ha Noi
third: Hue


fourth: Nha Trang
Fifth: HCM city


<i><b>1.Checking prediction</b></i>




<i><b>2.Gird (A 5)</b></i>



<i>place </i>
<i>to </i>
<i>visit</i>
<i>where to </i>
<i>stay</i>
<i>How </i>
<i>long</i>


<i>What to do</i>


<b>First</b> Ha
Long
bay


with uncle,
aunt


2 days see Ha Long
bay


<b>Then</b> Ha
Noi


hotel 3days see Ngoc Son
temple


<b>Next</b> Hue with friends 2days see citadel


<b>After </b>
<b>that</b>


Nha
Trang
friend’s
house


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

column one of the Grid below


- Ask Ss to practice asking and


answering about the grid by using the
questions on page 143.


Ss : do as directed


<b> D.Post-reading:</b>


-Have Ss the same the gird heading
but this times fill it with their own
plansfor the summer vacation.
-Then ask Ss to answer in the same
ways of A 5, but replace pronouns


<b>Finall</b>


<b>y</b> HCMCity grandparents’ house a week visit grandparents
<i><b>3.Asking and Answering</b></i>


S1Which place are Phuong and Mai going to
visit first?



S2:They are going to visit Ha Long bay first.
S1:Where are they going to stay?


S2:They are going to stay with their aunt and
uncle


S1:How long are they going to stay?
S2:They are going to stay for 2 days.
S1:What are they going to do?


S2: They are going to see Ha Long bay.


<i><b>* Gird</b></i>


-Where are you going to visit?
-Where are you going to stay?
-Who are you going to stay with?
-How long are you going to stay for?
-What are you going to do there?


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: -Write their plans for the next summer vacation


-Prepare next part ‘B 1-4’


<i>Date of pre : 22/03/2011</i> <i> </i> <i> </i> <i> Week : 30</i>


<i>Date of tea : 23/03/2011</i>


<i> Period : 85</i>



<b>UNIT 14 : MAKING PLANS</b>


Lesson 3- Section B<b> : FREE TIME PLANS (B 1-4)</b>


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to do further speaking
practice with “going to” to talk about plans for the near future.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : What are you going to do tomorrow?
I’m going to do my homework.


 Vocabulary :review


<b>III. Techniques :</b> Finding friends , pair work ; chatting, Guessing.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

<i><b></b></i>
<i><b>---V. Procedures</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Ss’</b>
<b>activities</b>


<b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up : </b>


- Call on some Ss to go to
the board and match the


verbs with the right phrase
words.


<b>B. Practice</b>


-Have Ss practice asking
and answering, using
Finding friends as a cue
-Ss: do as directed.
-Ss: copy the dialogue
-Ss: listen and fill the gaps
in pairs.


Then Ss read B1 on page
144 and check their
prediction.


-T : correct the mistakes


-Have Ss look at the
mapped dialogue and make
the dialogues


Ss : do as directed


<i><b>* Finding friends.</b></i>


ho
m
ew


or
k
m
y
fr
ie
nd
a
so
cc
er
m
at
ch
a
m
ov
ie
ba
dm
in
to
n
m
y
m
om
w
al
ki

ng


<i><b>see</b></i>    


<i><b>play</b></i> 


<i><b>do</b></i> 


<i><b>visit</b></i>  


<i><b>help</b></i> 


<i><b>go</b></i> 


<i><b>watch</b></i>  


S1: What are you going to do tomorrow?
S2:I’m going to do my homework.


<i><b>B1: Listen and repeat. Then practice with a partner</b></i>
<i><b>*.Predict dialogue : </b></i>


Tuan: What are you going to do tonight?
Lan: I’m going to ...
Tuan: What are you going tomorrow?


Lan:It’s Sunday. I’m going to ..., then we’re
goingto ... What about you?


Tuan:Tonight, I’m going to ...


Tomorrow, I’m going to...


<i><b>B2. Prepare 2 dialogues with a partner. Then write </b></i>
<i><b>them in your exercise book.</b></i>


<i><b>*.Mapped Dialogu</b></i>e


<b> You </b> <b>Your friend</b>
<b>...tonight?</b>


<b>... .help my mom</b>
<b>...tomorrow?</b>
<b>...play volleyball</b>


<b> ... see a movie.</b>
<b> ... tonight?</b>


<b> ……… go walking.</b>
<b> ... tomorrow?</b>


<b> B3: Listen and read. Then practice with a partner</b>


<i><b>*.Speaking</b></i> (B3)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

- Read the dialogue
- Ss: listen


-Ss : role play to read the
dialogue.



- Ask Ss some questions.
-Ss : answer (whole class).
-Guide Ss to play the game.
- Ask Ss to practice in pairs
to ask and answer the
question


Ss : do as directed


- Give the correct answers.
<b>C.Consolidation</b> :


- Have Ss talk about their
themselves


Ss : free talk


-Which movie theater is Ba going to see?
What is he going to see?


<i><b>B4: Answer. Then write the answer in your exercise </b></i>
<i><b>book. </b></i>


<i><b>* Chain game</b></i>


S1: On Saturday morning, I’m going to go shopping.
S2: On Saturday morning, I’m going to go shopping.
and on Saturday afternoon I’m going to wach a soccer
match.



S3: . . .


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: <i><b> </b></i>- Write about their own activities


- Prepare next part B 5, 6


<i>Date of pre : 22/03/2011</i> <i> Week : 30</i>


<i>Date of tea : 23/03/2011</i>


<i> Period : 86</i>


<b>UNIT 14 : MAKING PLANS</b>


Lesson 4- Section B<b> : FREE TIME PLANS (B 5-6)</b>


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to do further listening
and reading practice with “going to” to talk about plans for the near future.


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : What are you going to do tomorrow?
I’m going to do my homework.


 Vocabulary : bring, camera, take a photo…
<b>III. Techniques :</b> Survey, brainstorm, Guessing . . .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>---IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.



<i><b>V. Procedures</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up : </b>


- Call on one student to go to the
board , then ask another student,
then fill them in the form.


Ss: Do as directed
<b>B. Pre-reading</b>


- Ask to listen one time
Ss: Listen


- Explain some new words
Ss: listen, copy down and repeat
- Set the scene: <i>Minh and his </i>
<i>friends are going to have a picnic. </i>
<i>You guess what they are going to </i>
<i>do by answering some questions</i>
<i>- </i>Hang the poster with the
questions in it on the board
- Give feedback


<b>C. While-reading</b>


- Read



Ss: Listen and repeat


Ss: Read individually and check
their prediction


- Give answer key
<b>D.Pre-listening</b> :


- Have Ss list the things which
they often bring for a camping
vacation.


Ss : free talk


- Stick the poster on the board
- Have Ss guess and do the
matching
<i><b>* Survey</b></i>
Tonight
?
On
Saturda
y?
On
Sunday
?
In the
summer
vacation?


Me
S1
S2
S3
. . .


S: What are you going to do . . .?
S1 : I am going to . . .


<i><b>B 5 : Listen and read </b></i>


1. Pre-teach : Vocabulary


- <i><b>to bring (mime )</b></i> : mang ( theo)


- <i><b>a camera (pict.)</b></i>: máy ảnh


- to <i><b>take a photo (trans): </b></i> chụp hình
* Check Vo: R & R


2. Pre-questions


a. Where are they going to do?


b. What three things are they going to bring?
c. What are they going to do there?


* Checking prediction
a. Near a lake



b. A camera, food and drink
c. Take photos


<i><b>B6: Listen</b></i>
<i><b>1. Brainstorm</b></i>


food a kite


a tent warm clothes


<i><b>2. Prediction</b></i>


<i>Vui a ball</i>
<i>Ly a camera</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

- Give feedback
<b>E.While-listening</b>


- Have Ss listen and check their
prediction


- Give answer key.


- Ask Ss to write about five girls
F<b>. Production</b>


- Guide Ss to play the game


<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Nam and Ly</i>



<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Tuan and Vui</i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Near a lake</i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Sapa</i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Minh, Nga and Mai</i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i>A ball</i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Vui</i>


<i><b>-</b></i> <i>Three days</i>


<i>Lan some food</i>
<i>Mai some drinks</i>
<i>Nga a tent</i>


<i><b>* Checking prediction</b></i>


Vui : c,e Ly :b Lan : a Mai: d Nga : d
- The tape transcript


<i>Vui and her friends are going to camping for 3 days</i>
<i>in Sapa. Vui is going to bring a tent and some food.</i>
<i>Lan is going to bring a ball. Ly is going to bring </i>
<i>her camera to take some photos . Nga and Mai are </i>
<i>going to bring some drinks.</i>


<i><b>3. Writing : </b></i>Ex: - <i>Vui is going to bring some food</i>



<i> - Ly is going to bring her camera</i>


- <i>Lan is going to bring a ball</i>


- <i>Nga and Mai are going to bring some drinks.</i>


<i><b>*Lucky numbers</b></i>


1 2 3 4* 5 6*
7* 8 9 10 11* 12
1.Name 2 people,who’re going to bring cameras?
2. Name 2 people, who are going to bring food?
3. Where is the boy picnic going to be?


5. Where are the girls going to go camping?
8. Name 3 people, who are going to bring drink?
9. What’s Lan going to bring?


10. Who’s going to bring a tent?


11. How many days are the girls going to camping
for?


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: <i><b> </b></i>- Learn vocabulary by heart and practice reading dialogue


- Prepare next part C


<i>Date of pre : 23/03/2011</i> <i> Week : 30</i>



<i>Date of tea : 24/03/2011</i>


<i> Period : 87</i>


<b>UNIT 14 : MAKING PLANS</b>


<i>Lesson 5- Section C</i><b> : SUGGESTIONS (C 1-4)</b>


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make suggestion
and responding and do futher practice in “want to do”.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

<i><b></b></i>
<b>---II. Language contents :</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : Let’s. . . ; What about . . . ; Why don’t we . . .
- To want to do sth


 Vocabulary : pagoda, minibus, too, far


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, Guessing, mapped dialogue.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. Procedures</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up : </b>


- Ask Ss some questions


Ss: Answer ( Whole class)
<b>B. Pre-reading</b>


- Turn on the tape once
Ss: Listen


- Explain some new words
Ss: listen and copy – Repeat
- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat


Ss: Do as directed


- Let Ss guess to answer the
questions


- Give feedback
<b>C. While-reading</b>


- Read


Ss: Listen and repeat


Ss: Read silently and check their
prediction


- Give answer key


- Let Ss play the role to practice
the dialogue



- Get Ss to answer the question in
pairs


- Call some pairs to demonstrate
in front of the class.


- Give answer key


* Chatting


1. Where do you often go on vacation?
2. How do you often go on vacation?


C1: Listen and read. Then practice in groups.
1, <b>Pre-teach</b> :


<i><b>- a pagoda (pict.): </b></i>chuøa


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>a minibus(pict.):</b></i> ô tô (buýt) 12-24 chỗ ngồi


<i><b>-</b></i> <i><b>too (adv)(trans.)</b></i>


<i><b>-far (adj) (trans.)</b></i>


<i><b> too far (trans.)</b></i>


<i><b>* Check Vo: R & R</b></i>
<i><b>2. Pre –questions</b></i>



<i><b>- </b></i>Where are they going to go?


<i><b>-</b></i> How are they going to travel?
3. Presentation dialogue


C2. <i><b>Answer. Then write the answer in your </b></i>


<i><b>exercise book</b></i>


Ex: SGK


a. He wants to go to Hue


b. She wants to go to Huong pagoda
c. She wants to go on foot.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

<b>-</b> Explain the structures
Ss: Listen and copy


- Hang the pictures on the board
- Have Ss make suggestion about
them


- Correct the mistakes
<b>D.Post-reading</b> :


- Have Ss look at the mapped
dialogue and build the dialogue ,
base on the dialogue on page 147
- Call on some pairs to talk in


front of the class.


g. He wants to go by minibus.


4.Structure : <i><b>đề nghị ai đó cùng làm gì với mình</b></i>


<i><b>a. Let’s . . . = Let us + V . . .( </b>chúng ta hãy )</i>


Ex: Let’s play soccer.


b. What about + V-ing . . . ?
Ex: What about going fishing?
c. Why don’t we + V . . . ?
Ex: Why don’t we see a movie?


<i><b> Đáp lại lời đề nghị</b></i>


<i><b>(+) : </b></i> Yes, that’s a good idea.


<i><b>(-</b></i> ) : No, I don’t want.


<i><b>* To want :</b></i> muoán


<i><b> </b></i><i><b> want (sb) to do sth</b></i>


Ex: I want to go fishing.
* Practice (picture drill – C3)
Ex: S1: Let’s go to the beach.
S2: That’s a good idea.
* Mapped dialogue



You Your friend


……….see a movie.
No, ………….too hot
………go to the museum
No, go by minibus


No, ……go to the beach
Yes, ………walk
Yes


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: <i><b> </b></i>- Learn structures by heart


- Write 6 sentences to make suggestion
- Prepare next part : Grammar practice


<i>Date of pre : 29/03/2011</i> <i> Week : 31</i>


<i>Date of tea : 30/03/2011</i> <i> Period : 88</i>


<b>GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>


<b>I. Objectives</b> : By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice in
present simple, Adverbs of frequencey, present progressive, “going to” future, the
weather


<b>II. Language contents :</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : Present simple, Adverbs of frequencey,



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

<i><b></b></i>


Present progressive, near future


 Vocabulary : review


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, Guessing, mapped dialogue.


<i><b>IV. Teaching aids</b></i> : pictures ; cassette, flash card.


<i><b>V. Procedures</b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and Ss’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A.Warm up : </b>


-Have Ss complete the dialogues
-Give feedback.


<b>B. Activity 1</b>


- Read the words in English
-Ss : listen and slap the words on
the board


Ss : play in teams
-T : correct if necessary
<b>C. Activity 2</b>



-Have Ss recall the structure :
S + be + V-ing...


- Set the scene: Today Hung’s on
vacation


-Ss: look at the charts and
practice asking and answering
-Have Ss complete the dialogue in
pairs


-Ss : recall the structure by
answering the question.
S + Be + going to + V


-Let Ss look at the pictures and
practice asking and answering in
pairs


<b>A.Present simple tense</b>


a.do-like-do-play-do-don’t


b.Does- does-likes-does-plays-does-doesn’t
c.Do-do-do-don’t


<b>B.Adverbs of Frequency</b>
<b>1.Slap the board</b>


Always usually sometimes often




Two times a year One a year


<b>2.Grammar Practice 2/150</b>


Noughts and Croosses


TV the movies the store
swimming your mom fishing
table tennis camping babminton
S1:How often do you go to the movies?
S2:Twice a week


<b>C.Present progressive tense</b>
<b>1.Word cue drill</b>


-get up at 6 / get up at 7
-go to school / go camping
-study / not study


-have rice for lunch / have a picnic
-walk home / walk in the mountain
S1:Hung usually gets up ay six.


S2:That’s right, but today he’s getting up at 7.


<b>2.Gap fill</b>


a. am watching – plaing – is swimming


b. is cooking – aren’t – am reading
c. am doing – am reading


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

-Ak Ss to complete the dialogue
on page 150 in pairs.


-Give answer key.


-Then Ss answer the questions on
page 152.


-Call some pairs to talk in front of
the class.


<b> D.Production</b> :


Have SS write a short paragraph
to make plan for a holiday by
answering the questions.


-T can use transformation writing
for weaker Ss.


-SS can change underline words


S1: What are you going to do ?
S2:I am going to play volleyball<i><b>.</b></i>


<b>1.Picture drill: (drammar prcatice 4)</b>



S1:What are they going to do?
S2: They are going to play soccer.


<b>2.Gap fill</b>


Han: What are you going to do?
Vui: I am going to visit Ha Noi.
Han: Where are you going to stay?
Vui: I am going to stay in a hotel.
Han: How long are you going to say?
Vui: I am going to stay for a week<b>.</b>
<b>3.Asking and Aanswering</b>


a.She is going to visit ha Noi.
b.She is going to stay in a hotel.
c.She is going to stay for a week.


<b>E.Future plans – The weather</b>
<b>a..Questions</b>


1.Where are you going to stay?
2.Who are you going to with?


3.Which season are you going to go in?
4.What’s the weather like then?


5.What are you going to bring with you?
6.how are you going to travel?


7.Where are you going to stay?



8.How long are you going to stay for?
9.What are you going to do there?


<b>b.Transformation writing</b>


I am going to Vung Tau with my family. We are
going to go in the summer.It’s hot but we like hot
weather.We’re going to bring cool clothes with us
and I am going to bring a camera to take some
photos. We’re going to travel by coach.In Vung
tau, we’re going to stay in a hotel for a week.
We’re going to see a beach and go swimming and
buy some seafood..


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> </b></i>: <i><b> </b></i> - Review all the structures


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

<i><b></b></i>


- Have a written test next period<i><b>.</b></i>


<i>Date of pre : 29/03/2011</i> <i> Week : 31</i>


<i>Date of tea : 30/03/2011</i> <i> </i>


<i>Period : 89</i>


<b>TEST ONE PERIOD</b>


I<b>/ Objectives</b>: By the end of the lesson, teacher will be able to check students’


knowledge form Unit 12 to Unit 14


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : Countability, Adjectives, Question words, Present progressive,
simple present, quantifiers


<sub></sub> Vocabulary :


<b>III. Techniques :</b>


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : Test


<b>V/ Procedures</b><i> :</i>


I. Đặt những trạng từ thường xuyên trong ngoặc vào đúng vị trí (2 marks)
1. Our family go to Sapa in the spring. (always)


………
2. We travel abroad by plane. (sometimes)


………
3. It’s cold in the summer days. ( never )


………


4. The students play volleyball in Physical education. ( often )
………


II. Nối các câu hỏi ở cột A với câu trả lời ở cột B. ( 2.5 marks )



<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1. What is he going to do this
weekend?


2. Who’s she going with


3.How long is he going to stay?
4. What’s his name?


5. How old is she?


A. She’s going with her aunt.
B. She’s nineteen.


C. For a week.


D. He’s going to visit Ha Long Bay.
C. His name’s Tam.


<i><b>III. Viết các động từ trong ngoặc đúng thì cho mỗi câu sau. ( 3 marks)</b></i>
1. We ……… Hue this summer vacation. (visit)
2. Why don’t we ……….kites? (fly)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

5. The boy ………. an ice-cream now.(eat)
6. Next week, they ……….. at home. (stay)
<i><b>IV. Chọn đáp án đúng ( 1.5 marks)</b></i>


1. It’s …………in the fall. A. cool B. cold



C. hot


2. How ………do you go to school? A. many B. often C.


much


3. We go to school six times ……….week. A. an B. a C.


in


4. Let’s ………swimming. A. to go B. go C. going


5. Mrs Johnson is going to …………dinner. A. cooks B. cook C.
to cook


6. ………..us go to the movies. A. What about B. Why don’t we C. Let
<i><b>V. Viết lại câu sau theo từ gợi ý (1 mark)</b></i>


1. Let’s play tennis. => What………
2. Why don’t we learn the lesson by heart? =>


Let’s………


<i><b>END</b></i>


<i>Date of pre : 30/03/2011</i> <i> Week : 31</i>


<i>Date of tea : 31/03/2011</i>



<i> Period : 90</i>


<b>TEST CORRECTION</b>


I. Đặt những trạng từ thường xuyên trong ngoặc vào đúng vị trí (2 marks)
1. Our family always go to Sapa in the spring.


2. We sometimes travel abroad by plane.
3. It’s never cold in the summer days.


4. The students often play volleyball in Physical education.
<i><b>II. Nối các câu hỏi ở cột A với câu trả lời ở cột B. ( 2.5 marks )</b></i>


1 – D 2 - A 3 - C 4 - E 5 - B
<i><b>III. Viết các động từ trong ngoặc đúng thì cho mỗi câu sau. ( 3 marks)</b></i>


1. We is going to visit Hue this summer vacation. (visit)
2. Why don’t we fly kites? (fly)


3. He often watches television.( watch)
4. Lan wants to go to Vung Tau very much.
5. The boy is eating an ice-cream now.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

<i><b></b></i>
---6. Next week, they are going to stay at home.


<i><b>IV. Chọn đáp án đúng ( 1.5 marks)</b></i>


1. It’s ………in the fall. <i><b>A. cool</b></i> B. cold



C. hot


2. How ………do you go to school? A. many <i><b>B. often</b></i> C.
much


3. We go to school six times………….week. A. an <i><b>B. a</b></i> C.


in


4. Let’s ………swimming. A. to go <i><b>B. go</b></i> C. going


5. Mrs Johnson is going to …………dinner. A. cooks <i><b>B. cook</b></i> C.
to cook


6. ………us go to the movies. A. What about B. Why don’t we <i><b>C. Let</b></i>
<i><b>V. Viết lại câu sau theo từ gợi ý (1 mark)</b></i>


1. Let’s play tennis. => What about playing tennis<i><b> .</b><b> </b></i>
2. Why don’t we learn the lesson by heart? => Let’s learn the lesson by
<i><b>heart</b></i>


<i>Date of pre : 05/04/2011</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 32</i>


<i>Date of tea : 06/04/2011</i>


<i> Period : 91,92</i>


UNIT 15 <b>: COUNTRIES</b>


<i><b>Lesson 1: Section A – WE ARE THE WORLD (</b></i><b>A1 - 6)</b>



<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know about other countries,
how to use their names, nationalities, and languages vocabulary to talk about
where people are from.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

- Which language do you speak ? – I speak Vietnamese
- What is your nationality? - I am Vietnamese.
 Vocabulary : world, visit,I’m from Vietnam


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,word square


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card, a world map


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> :


- Have Ss play game “ noughts and
crosses”


Ss : do as directed
B<b>. Presentation :</b>


- Use a world map and show Ss the


locations of Vietnam, USA, France,
Japan, China, Australia, Great Britain
Ss : look at the map and listen


- Introduce oneself and others, using
the following structures


Ss: Try to take part in practicing how
to introduce oneself, using the cues
given.


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen to
the cassette - Ss : listen & repeat
- Let them introduce themselves, look
at the picture and play the roles of
Laura, Marie, Lee , John, Yoko,
Susan, Bruce, and Minh


Ss: Look at the picture and listen to
the teacher’s request, then introduce
people as the teacher shows.


- Introduce the Wh-question and the
answer


Ss: Notice the new structures given by
the teacher.


- Let Ss practice in pairs ask and
answer about the places they come


from.


<i><b>* Noughts and crosses</b></i>


Play Want Cook


Visit Watch See


Stay Go Walk


<i><b>1. Listen and repeat. </b></i>
<b> Vocabulary : </b>


<i>-<b> world (trans.): thế giới</b></i>


<i>I’m ………. I’m from Viet Nam</i>.


<i>And this is John . He’s from the USA</i>


<b>* Model sentences:</b>


<i><b>Where is ……… from?</b></i>
<i><b>He’s / She’s ……….. </b></i>


Ex: Where is he from? He’s from Japan.
<i><b>2. Listen and read :</b></i>


<b>* Model sentences:</b>


<i>- <b>Which language do/ does you /he speak?</b></i>



<i><b>- I speak ………..</b></i>
<i><b>- He speaks ………..</b></i>


Ex: - Which language do you speak? - I
speak Vietnamese.


- Which language does Mimh speak?-He
speaks Vietnamese.


<i><b>3. Listen and repeat. </b></i>


Ex: My name is Hoa. I am from Vietnam.
I speak Vietnamese.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

<i><b></b></i>
---Ss: Practice in pairs


- Show them pictures of some famous
people and ask them about their
countries and nationalities


Ss: Do as the teacher says


- Read the sentences and ask them to
listen attentively


- Ask them to retell Minh’s
introduction



- Introduce new structure


- Ask some more questions about
Susan, Yoko , . . .


- Have them build up new sentences
- Let Ss listen to the tape twice and
repeat in chorally, then individually
- Ask Ss to give the ways to introduce
about themselves


- Introduce the way to ask and answer
about nationality.


<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Hang the poster on the board
Ss: Copy the table in the notebooks
and complete the sentences


- Model with a student


- Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask and
answer the question


Ss : do as directed


- Give the correct answers.
- Show Ss some postcards
- Read the postcard aloud



- Mention the situation when the
writer writes the postcard


- Ask questionns to elicit the content
of the postcard


- Help Ss to write their own poscard
Explain how a postcard is written
Ss: Write a postcard as requested


<b>* Model sentences:</b>


<i>- <b>What’s your nationality?- I’m </b></i>


<i><b>Vietnamese</b></i>


<i><b>4. Make dialogues. Practice with a </b></i>
<i><b>partner. Use the table in exercise 3</b></i>


<i>A: Who’s that?</i>


<i>B: That’s ………(name)</i>
<i>A: Where is he/she from?</i>


<i>B: He’s / She’s from………(country)</i>
<i>A: Wht’s his/her nationality?</i>


<i>B: He’s / She’s ……….(nationality)</i>



<i><b>5. Write. Read this postcard from Nhan</b></i>
1. Where is Nhan? He is on vacation on
London.


2. How does he traveling? By bus.
3. Who is writing the postccard? Nhan
4. Where is Nhan going to visit tomorrow?
He is going to visit the tower of London.
Dear………. (the beginning)


I’m on vacation in London.The weather is


I’m going ………..by (means of transport)
and (visiting) ………..


Tomorrow, I’m going to ……….


<i><b>6. Answer. Then write the answers in your </b></i>
<i><b>notebook</b></i>


<i><b>7. Remember</b></i>


* Note: a. Where are you from? – I’m
from Viet Nam.


b. Which language do you speak?- I speak
Vietnamese.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

(Use the model to rewrite)


<b>D. Further-practice</b>


- Tell Ss to practice asking and


answering the following questions and
write a short report.


Ss: Practice in pairs
<b>E. Production</b>


- Ask Ss to write the notes and learn
by heart


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Do exercises on page 124,125,126 in the workbook.</b></i>


- Prepare Unit 15: <b>B1,2</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

<i><b></b></i>


<i>---Date of pre : 06/04/2011</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 32</i>


<i>Date of tea : 07/04/2011</i> <i> Period : 93</i>


UNIT 15

<b>: COUNTRIES</b>



<i><b>Lesson 2: Section B –</b></i>

CITIES,BUILDINGS AND PEOPLE (B1,2)



<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to compare places using “


comparative and superlative adjectives of one syllable.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : Comparative and superlative adjectives
 Vocabulary :


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,matching, word cue drill


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures, flash card


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b> : ’


- Have Ss choose the adjectives
which best describe the city. A city
can have more than one adjective.
Ss: do as teacher’s directed


<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Show Ss a picture in which 3
things were drawn in 3 exactly
different size


Ss: Look at the picture . Notice the
different size of things presented


- Choose 3 Ss who have different
height and ask them to stand before
the class . Ask Ss to observe and tell
about each one


Ss: Observe


- Write the words on the board and
ask Ss to repeat


Ss: Look at the board and repeat the
new words as the teacher requested
- Let Ss observe the 3 different
adjectives . Ask them to say what


<i><b>* Matching</b></i>


hot Hue small
HCM


wet Hoi An cold
Sapa


big HaNoi
Long Xuyen
<i><b>B1. Listen and repeat</b></i>


a. Presentation text
* Pre – teach



- a big building
a bigger building
the biggest building
- a small house


a smaller house
the smallest house
- a tall building
a taller building
the tallest building


b. Models


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

the difference is and give the
formation of the comparative and
superlative form


Ss: Observe and notice the
difference of the phrases given.
- Have them copy the models and
formations, and memorize.


Ss: take notes and learn by heart.


<b>C. Practice</b> :


- Hang the poster on the board
- Model with one student
- Have Ss practice in pairs
- Correct the mistakes


<b>D. Further Practice</b> :
- Hang the poster on the board
Ss: Make sentences


- Correct the mistakes


What’s the tallest mountain in
Vietnam?


What’s the biggest river in
Vietnam?


What’s the wettest city in Vietnam?
What’s the coldest town in


Vietnam?(in the winter)


What’s the biggest city in Vietnam?
What’s the hottest town in vietnam?
(in May)


- Ask Ss to make a sentence


comparing their home town with the
town in the box


Ss: Do as the teacher says


- Give feedback and correct the
mistakes



<i><b> Short adjective + ER . . .</b></i>


<i><b>* Superlative form of short adjectives</b></i>
<i><b>Short adjective + EST . . .</b></i>


<i><b>Note:- </b> in the superlative form, the definite</i>


<i>article THE is written before the adjective</i>
<i> - double last letter + ER/ EST</i>


Ex: big  bigger  the biggest
c. Word cue drill


“ big”
“ small”
“ wet”


“ hot” ‘in May’
Ex: S1: Hanoi is the bigger than Da Nang
S2: But HCMC is the biggest.


d. Answer given
Phanxipang
The Mekong
Hue


Sapa
HCM
Ha Tinh



e. Noughts and crosses


Hanoi Hue Sapa


HCMC Da Nang Hoi An


Hai Phong Can Tho Dalat


Ex: S1. Hanoi is bigger than Buon Ma Thuot
city.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Write 5 sentences to use “comparative and supperlative”</b></i>


- Learn by heart the form of comparative and supperlative


- Prepare Unit 15: B3-5.


<i>Date of preparation: 10/04/2011</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 33</i>
LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

<i><b></b></i>


<i>---Date of teaching : 1 /04/2011</i>


<i> Period : 94</i>


UNIT 15 :

<b>COUNTRIES</b>



<i><b>Lesson 3: Section B </b></i>

CITIES,BUILDINGS AND PEOPLE (B3-5 )




<b>I/ Objectives</b>: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read facts about
famous places in the world and practicing comparatives


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


 Grammar : Comparative and superlative adjectives
 Vocabulary : high, long , thick, over, million


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,lucky numbers


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures, flash card
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Play “ lucky numbers”
Ss: do as teacher’s directed


<b>B. Pre- reading</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss to listen one
time



Ss : listen


- Explain some new words by using
pictures, translation


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat
T play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


- Have Ss play the game in groups
Ss: Do as directed


<i><b>* Lucky numbers</b></i>


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. What’s the biggest city in Vietnam?
(HCMC)


2. What’s the biggest city in Britain?
(London)


3. What’s the biggest city in Japan? (Tokyo)
4. Lucky number


5. What’s the tallest mountain you know?
6. Lucky number



7. What’s the wettest city you know?
8. Which one’s colder. Can Tho or Sapa?
<i><b>B2.Listen & read. Then answer the</b></i>
<i><b>questions:</b></i>


<b> Vocabulary : </b>
- high (mime)
- long (mime)
- thick (mime)
- over (trans.)
- a million (trans.)
* Check : Matching
 Wordsquare


W E T B I G


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

- Ask Ss to put the cities in order :
biggest first.


<b>C. While- reading</b> :


- Have Ss read the text and check
their order


Have Ss work in pair to ask and
answer the questions


Ss: work in pairs.
- Correct the mistakes



- Direct Ss to look at the text and
guess the meanings of a population, a
capital city


- Direct Ss to look at the text and the
picture and guess the meanings of : a
building, meters, a structure,


kilometers.


- Have Ss work in pairs to read the
text and ask and answer the questions
on page 160-161


<b>D. Consolidation</b> :


- Put Ss into 2 teams, each team
develops 7 questions to ask the other
team


- What’s the biggest city in the world?
- How many people live in Tokyo?/
What’s the population of Tokyo?
- Which city has a population of 6.3
million?/ Which city is smaller
than . . . ?


- Which city(in Vietnam) has a
population of 3.5 million?



- Which city is bigger than the capital /
Hanoi?


- How tall is the Sears Tower?
- What’s the tallest building in the


L O N G E R


L V O L D X


A E D L O C


T R H I G H


 Ordering


Which is the biggest city in the world?
HCMC LONDON TOKYO HANOI
MEXICO CITY


<b>1. Reading and checking</b>


HCMC (4) LONDON(3)
TOKYO(2)


HANOI (5) MEXICO CITY(1)
2. Comprehension question


a. No, Ho Chi Minh City is bigger than
Hanoi.



b.Mexico city
c. Tokyo


B3 &B4: Listen and read. Then answer the
<i><b>questions</b></i>


3. Guess from context


<b>4. Comprehension questions </b>


- Which is taller: Sears Tower or Petronas
Twin Towers?- Petronas Twin Towers is
taller than Sears Tower.


- How long is the Great Wall? It is over
6,000 kilometers long.


- How high is the Great Wall? It is between
4 and 12 meters high.


- How thick is the Great Wall? It is over 9
meters thick.


<b> Answer given</b>
- Mexico city
- 12 million
- London
- HCMC



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

<i><b></b></i>
---world?


- Where is Petronas Twin Tower?
- How tall is Petronas Twin Tower?
- What’s the longest structure in the
world?


- Where is the Great Wall?
- How long is the Great Wall?
- How high is the Great Wall?
- How thick is the Great Wall?


- Chicago
- 442 meters


- Petronas Twin Towers
- Malaysia


- 452 meters
- The Great Wall
- China


- 6,000 kilometers
- 4 to 12 meters
- Over 9 meters


<i><b>* HOMEWORK </b><b> : - Learn by heart new words </b></i> <i><b> </b></i>


- Prepare: Unit 15 (<b>C1-2)</b>



<i>Date of preparation: 18/04/2011</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 34</i>


<i>Date of teaching : /04/2011</i>


<i> Period : 95</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

<i><b>Lesson 4: Section C – </b></i>

NATURAL FEATURES (C1-2)



<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “ lots of . . .” as a quantifier
with Geography vocabulary to describe Vietnam.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : Does Vietnam have any ………..?
<i><b> Yes,it does. / No, it doesn’t </b></i>


 Vocabulary : a forest rain desert great


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting,slap the board


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>



- Play “ slap the board”
Ss : do as teacher’s directed


<b>B. Presentation</b> :


- Show a map of Vietnam to


introduce some interesting places :
Hue, Vung Tau, . . .


- Turn on the tape once
Ss: Listen


- Explain some new words
Ss: listen and copy – Repeat


- Play the tape again and get Ss to
listen and read silently


Ss: Do as directed


- Have Ss read the text again &
answer the question: What are the 6
‘natural features’ Lan tell us about ?


<b>C. Practice : </b>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the
book . Read the passage and then



<i><b>* Slap the board</b></i>





C1. Listen and read
<i><b>1. Pre-teach</b></i>


<i><b>- a forest (pict.)</b></i>
<i><b>- a desert (ex.)</b></i>
<i><b>- rain (trans.)</b></i>
<i><b>- great (trans.)</b></i>


<i><b>- lots of = many = a lot of </b></i>


<i><b>* Check Vo : Rub out and rememder</b></i>
2. Presentation text


<i><b>(C1 / P. 162 -163)</b></i>


* Comprehension question


1. mountain 2. river 3. lakes
4. rain 5. forest 6. beaches
3. Model sentence


We have lots of mountains / rivers/ forests?
rain ?



4.Complete the passage
LESSON PLAN – ENGLISH 6 Năm học 2010-2011


beautiful green beaches


lakes fields


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

<i><b></b></i>
---find the correct words Ss to complete


the sentences(Get Ss to complete the
sentences in group and cross check)
Ss : do as directed


- Let Ss join the game, ask and
answer the questions, review the
words studied. (Let them practice in
pairs freely)


Ss: Join the game, try to ask many
questions as possible


- Correct the answer


- Read sentence by sentence


Ss: Listen.If the sentence is true, Ss
repeat . If it is wrong, they listen


<b>D. Production : </b>



- Divide the class into 2 groups. Let
Ss play the game


S1: Are there any forests in
Vietnam?


S2: Yes, there are lots of them


a. mountains b. rivers c, lakes d. rain
e. forests f. beaches g. deserts


C2. Look at the pictures again . Ask and
<i><b>answer.</b></i>


<b>1. Picture drill</b>


<i><b>C2 – p.164 (a-g)</b></i>
<i><b>Example exchange</b></i>


<i><b>S1: Does Vietnam have any ………..?</b></i>
<i><b>S2: Yes,it does. / No, it doesn’t.</b></i>


<b>2. True / False repetition drill</b><i><b> S</b></i>
<i><b>T: There are lots of beaches in Danang. </b></i>
<i><b>[Repeat]</b></i>


<i><b>- There are lots of forests in Ha Noi </b></i>
<i><b>[Silent]</b></i>



<i><b>- There are lots of lakes in Ha Noi. </b></i>
<i><b>[ Repeat]</b></i>


<i><b>- There are lots of mountains in Dalat </b></i>
<i><b>[Repeat]</b></i>


<i><b>- There are lots of fields in HCMC </b></i>
<i><b>[Silent]</b></i>


<i><b>- There are lots of people in HCMC. </b></i>
<i><b>[ Repeat]</b></i>


<i><b>- There are lots of rain in Vietnam </b></i>
<i><b>[Repeat]</b></i>


<i><b>- There are lots of rain in a desert </b></i>
<i><b>[ Silent]</b></i>


* Noughts and crosses


mountain Interesting places Lakes


beaches rivers Buildings


trees rain forests


<i><b>* HOMEWORK : - </b><b> Learn by heart the form of simple present and new words </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195>

<i>Date of preparation: 19/04/2011</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 34</i>



<i>Date of teaching : /04/2011</i> <i> </i>


<i> Period : 96 </i>


UNIT 15 <b>: COUNTRIES</b>


<i><b>Lesson 5: Section C – NATURAL FEATURES (C3-4)</b></i>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a text about the worlg’s
great rivers and mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using
comparatives and superlatives


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : Does Vietnam have any ………..?
<i><b> Yes,it does. / No, it doesn’t </b></i>


 Vocabulary : (to) flow to, the sea, tibet, North Africa, start


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, wordsquare


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card
<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>



- Have Ss play the game
“ Matching”


Ss : do as teacher’s directed




<b>B. Pre - reading</b> :


- Use the picture to introduce the
context


Ss : listen


- Play the tape and ask Ss listen
one time


Ss : listen


- Explain some new words


<i><b> * </b></i>Wordsquare


R I V E R S W C


M S T A R T S H


E L B E A C H I


T R E E I G I N



E I R O N E G A


R G L O T S H O


S D L R O W X F


great ,long


meters, or, rain, to, high, china, of


river, start, beach, tree, in, iron, one, on,
lots, row


world girl


C3. Listen and read. Then answer the
<i><b>questions: </b></i>


<i> Vocabulary : </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=196>

<i><b></b></i>
---Ss :- listen and copy down


- repeat


- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus)


Ss : do as directed



- Have Ss close their books and
guess which statements are true
and which is false.


- Ss: Guess
- Give feedback


<b>C. While-reading</b>


- Have Ss read the text and check
their predictions


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and
answer the questions.


Ss work in pairs


T : correct and give the correct
answers


- Divide the class into 2 groups and
ask them to play game (if having
the time)


Ss: Do as directed


2. What are <i>two great rivers in </i>
<i>Vietnam?</i>



<i>3. Make a sentence about the </i>
<i>highest mountain in the world.</i>
<i>4. How long is the Red River?</i>
<i>5. How high is mount Everest?</i>
<i>6. Make a sentence about the </i>
<i>highest mountain in Viet Nam</i>
<i>8. Where does the Red River start?</i>
<i>9. How long is the Nile?</i>


<b>D. Consolidation : </b>


- Have Ss take into and memorize


- the sea (pict.): biển
- Tibet: tây tạng


- North Africa (trans): Bắc Phi


- Mediterranean Sea( trans): biển địa trung hải
- start (trans): bắt đầu, bắt nguồn


<i><b>* Check Vo: Slap the board</b></i>


<i> T/F prediction : </i>


<i>1. There are two great rivers in Vietnam</i>


<i>2. The Red River</i> <i>is longger than the Mekong </i>


<i>River.</i>



<i>3. The Red River and the Mekong River both </i>
<i>start in China.</i>


<i>4. The longest river in the world is not in </i>
<i>Vietnam.</i>


<i>5. Phanxipang is the highest mountain in the </i>
<i>world.</i>


1. Reading and checking


1. T 2. F 3. F
4. T 5. F


2. Comprehension questions


a. The Mekong River is the longest river in
Viet Nam.


b. It starts in Tibet


c. The Nile River is the longest river in the
world.


d. It flows to Mediterranean Sea.


e. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in
the world.



f. Phanxipang is the highest mountain in Viet
Nam


3. Lucky numbers


1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15
1 ,7,12 are lucky numbers


<i>10. How high is Phanxipang?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=197>

<i>13. Make a sentence using “ longer than” about</i>
<i>the Mekong River and The Red River.</i>


<i>14. Where does the Nile start and where does it </i>
<i>flow to?</i>


<i>15. Make a sentence about the longest river in </i>
<i>Viet Nam </i>


<i><b>C4.Remember (p. </b></i><b>165)</b>


Note: Use “ Many” with countable noun
- Use “ Much” with uncountable noun


- Use “ a lot of , lots of” with countable noun
and uncountable noun.


<i><b>* HOMEWORK : - </b><b> Learn by heart the new words</b></i>



<i><b> - Prepare : Unit 16 : A1,2,3</b></i>


<i>Date of preparation: 19/4/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 32</i>


<i>Date of teaching : 21/4/2010</i> <i> </i>


<i> Period : 92</i>


UNIT 16 <b>: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Section A – ANIMALS AND PLANTS (A1,2,3)</b></i>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the questions “ How much”
“ How many” & indefinite quantifiers: some, a lot, a little, a few to talk about
food. And read a text about farming .


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : How much is there ? There is a lot of / a little rice


How many eggs are there ? There are a lot of / some / a few
eggs.


 Vocabulary : animals, buffalo, cow, plow, pull a cart, grow, (to) produce


<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, jumble words


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<i><b>V/ Procedures </b></i>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>A. Warm up : </b>


- Use the methods jumbled words,
Ss : do as directed


<b>B.Presentation</b>


* Jumble words


toespota = potatoes gegs = eggs
werflos = flowers icer = rice
motatoes = tomatoes nonios
<b>A 1. Listen and repeat</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=198>

<i><b></b></i>


--- Use the picture to introduce the
context


-Give some questions


-Ss: look at the pictures and answer.
-Write the questions and the
answers on the board.


-Explain and give structures


-Ss: listen and copy.


-Let Ss look at the pictures of A 3 on
page 167 and do the matching while
listening.


-Ss: work individually.
-T: give correct answers.


<b>C Presentation text </b>
<b>1.pre-raeding</b>


- Explain some new words by using
pictures, translation


Ss : listen and copy down - repeat
- Play the tape again and get Ss to
repeat ( chorus – individual)


Ss : do as directed


-Ss: predict 6 things Mr Hai has on
his farm and five things he produces
-Give feedback


<b>3.While-reading</b>


- Have Ss read the text and check
their prediction



-Give answer key


-Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask


How much rice is there?
Ex:There is some rice
a lot of / lots of rice
a little rice
Ex:How many eggs are there?
There are some eggs


a lot of / lots of eggs
a few eggs


* Notes


+ <b>some / a lot of / lots of / a little + N (khoâng</b>
<b>đếm đươc)</b>


<b>+ some / a lot of / lots of / a few + N (đếm </b>
<b>được số nhiều)</b>


<b>2.Practice: Matching (A 3)</b>


*<i>The tape transcrip</i>


<i>1.There are a lot of vegetables</i>
<i>2.There are some flowers.</i>
<i>3.there are some tomatoes.</i>
<i>4.There are a lot of potatoes</i>


<i>5.There are a few onions</i>
<i>6.there is a little rice.</i>


1.d 2.f 3.b 4.a 5.c 6.e


<i><b>A2:Listen and read .Then answer the </b></i>
<i><b>questions</b></i>


<b>a.Voaobulary</b>
<i><b>-a buffalo (pict)</b></i>
<i><b>-to grow (act/pict)</b></i>
<i><b>-to produce (trans)</b></i>
<i><b>-to plow (trans / pict)</b></i>
<i><b>-pull a cart (trans)</b></i>
<i><b>-enviroment (trans)</b></i>
<i><b>-a dog (pict)</b></i>


<i><b>-a cat (pict)</b></i>
<i><b>-a cow (pict)</b></i>


<i><b>-an animal (example</b></i>)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=199>

and answer the questions
Ss : do as directed


-T gives correct answers.


<b> D.Production: </b>


- Remind the model sentences


Ss : listen


- Show the picture and make
questions


-Ss answer


<b>*Mr Hai has:</b>


1.paddy field 2.a small vegetable field
3.fruit trees 4.buffalo


5.cows 6.chickens


<i><b>* Mr Hai produces:</b></i>


1.rice 2.vegetables


3.fruit 4.milk 5. eggs


<b>b.Comprehentsion Questions :</b>


a.He produces of rice
b.Yes, he does


c.He produces a little fruit
d.They produce a little milk
e.They produce a lot of eggs.
* <b>Picture drill (A 1- A 3)</b>



Ex:S1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is a lot of rice


Ex: S1:How many onions are there?
S2: There are a few onions.


<i>Date of preparation: 25/4/2010</i> <i> </i> <i>Week : 33</i>


<i>Date of teaching : 27/4/2010</i>


<i> Period : 93</i>


UNIT 16 <b>: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT</b>
<i><b>Lesson 2: Section A – ANIMALS AND PLANTS (A4-6)</b></i>


<b>I/ Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to can read a text bout the
environment to understadn ideas in term of cause and effect “why...?”
“because....”


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


<sub></sub> Grammar : How much is there ? There is a lot of / a little rice


How many eggs are there ? There are a lot of / some / a few
eggs.


 Vocabulary : cut down, burn, destroy...



<b>III. Techniques :</b> pair work ; chatting, matching


<b>IV/ Teaching aids</b> : pictures ; cassette, flash card


<b>V/ Procedures</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=200>

<i><b></b></i>
<b> A.Warm up:</b>


- Call two ss to go to the board
and do the matching


Ss: do as teacher’s directed
-Give correct answer .


<b> </b>


<b>B.Pre-reading</b>


- Stick the picture on the board,
then set the scence


Ss: Listen , look at the picture and
guess the content of the text


- Explain some new words and
read.


-Ss: listen and repeat



- Stick the pictures on the board
- Read the text,


-Ss: listen and order them without
looking their books..


<i><b>* Matching</b></i>


1.the population
2.the world
3. grow
4.food
5.forest
6.farmer
7.fields
8.animals


a.rừmg
b.trồng
c.cánh đồng
d.dân số
e.động vật
f.nông dân
g.thức ăn
h.thế giới
* Set the scence


<b>1.pre-teach</b>.
-land (n) (pict)
-to cut down (pict)


-to burn (trans)
-to destroy (trans)


-dangerous (adj) (trans)
a danger (trans)


</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×